JP2020039975A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a game board including a game area on a front; a shooting device for shooting game balls toward to the game area; distribution means for distributing the game balls passing through a specific area inside the game area to one of a first passage and a second passage that are formed on the game area; a first start pocket permitting entry of the game balls flowing down the first passage; a second start pocket permitting entry of the game balls flowing down the second passage, and having a degree of advantage differing from that of the first start pocket; lottery means for holding a lottery based on entry into the first start pocket or the second start pocket; and profit awarding means for awarding predetermined profit based on a lottery result. The game machine allows the game balls to alternately flow down the first passage and the second passage by the distribution means, and allows the game balls to successively enter the first start pocket and the second start pocket.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 114

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a game area is formed on a front surface of a game board and a plurality of starting ports are provided in the game area. In such a gaming machine, when a player operates an operation handle and a game ball hit toward the game area enters one of a plurality of starting ports, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to make a big hit. . Then, when the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit gaming state for giving a profit to the player is generated.

  Further, it has been proposed that the plurality of starting ports include a first starting port and a second starting port having a higher degree of advantage than the first starting port, each of which is provided at a separated position in the game area. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2006-16021

  In the above-described gaming machine, a game is performed aiming at any one of the plurality of starting ports in accordance with the gaming state, but when a plurality of gaming balls are driven toward the gaming area, the plurality of gaming balls is Since it is possible to continuously enter the second starting port, if the player only enters the second starting port having a high degree of advantage, the game manager (hole side) is disadvantaged unilaterally. On the other hand, when a plurality of game balls continuously enter the first starting port and enter only the first starting port having a low degree of advantage, the player is disadvantaged unilaterally, and There was a risk that the interest would be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A game board having a game area on the front,
A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area,
Distributing means for distributing a game ball passing through a specific area in the game area to one of a first passage and a second passage formed in the game area;
A first starting port into which a game ball flowing down the first passage can enter;
A second starting port in which a game ball flowing down the second passage is enterable, and has a different degree of advantage from the first starting port;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a ball entering the first starting port or the second starting port;
Profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit based on the result of the lottery,
A game ball is caused to flow alternately into the first passage and the second passage by using the distribution means, so that the ball can be sequentially entered into the first starting port and the second starting port. .

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which removed the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member is attached to the main body side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit taken apart from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from behind with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the right front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the left front. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from lower left rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the lower plate in a state where the lower plate cover is removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a different ball guiding portion than (a). FIG. 4C is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a different ball guiding portion is further provided. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is an explanatory view in which (c) is a schematic perspective view of the lower plate of (b). (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended. FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). 48A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 48B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit and looked from before. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the effect operation unit and looked from behind. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 51. (A) is a view in which the effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to hide a part where the operation button is to be hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame, or the like. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit viewed from a direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is the explanation drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 64 (a) cut along a line GG. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 64 (b) taken along line HH. (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd effect operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended, with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub-screen of the screen unit. It is the explanatory view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extended in the state turned to the front. 74A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. (A) is to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, and the like in a view when the main screen is directed forward and the second operation operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which exists, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like in a view of the operation button with the sub-screen facing forward, viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which exists, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of a door frame right side unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 82 (a). 82A is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 82A, and FIG. 82B is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 82A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked from behind. FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 87. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from the disassembly before. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from back and disassembled. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower full tank path unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit from behind and disassembled. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a distribution member. It is a figure explaining a flow of a game ball in the 1st passage. It is a figure explaining a flow of a game ball in the 2nd passage. It is a figure explaining a flow of a game ball in the 2nd passage. It is an explanatory view showing a part of a function display unit enlarged from the front in a state where a game board is attached to a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120. It is the schematic of various detection signals input / output to the connection terminal board of rental devices, such as a game ball, which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120. It is a block diagram showing the outline of peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and sound control unit. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 127 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 127. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board which a main control board receives. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure for a main process executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing a procedure for an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting-port passage process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the preliminary determination process performed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting-port passage process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process performed by a main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used in a lottery process for a hit, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used in a lottery process for a type of a big hit, and (C) is a type of a small hit Is a small hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process for (1), and (D) is a table showing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit start process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hitting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the general figure pre-determination process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by a main control MPU. (A) is a public figure hit determination table used in the lottery process for the general figure hit, and (B) is a general figure hit open pattern table used for the determination processing about the open pattern at the time of the general figure hit. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process performed by the main control MPU. It is a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol change process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol stop process performed by a main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal electric accessory opening processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16mS regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control processing performed by a peripheral control MPU. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of the effect display device in the chance mode. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of an effect in a chance mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. This is an example of an effect display that is executed when the transition control is performed from the normal mode to the chance mode and a game ball is received in the second starting port during the chance mode. It is an example of the effect display in the chance mode. It is an example of an effect display during a last battle effect. It is an example of an effect display during a last battle effect.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the device as viewed from behind after being disassembled.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape having a vertically extending outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. And a dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the front face, and a player attached to the center of the dish unit 320 according to a game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. An effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 mounted above the door frame right side unit 550 and above the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600, which is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and the upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are rotatable. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the main body frame base 600 And a ball launching device 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the body frame mounted on the right side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. 4, And a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L-shape which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. Payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 which is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 in front view for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 at the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 The payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, and the game balls that are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and that are paid out by the payout device 830. An upper full tank path unit 850 that guides and discharges game balls from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e in accordance with the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320; A normal guide path 861 and a full guide path that guide the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guide the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861 The game ball released from the tongue discharge port 850 e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receiving port 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 that is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and houses a power supply board therein, An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a payout control board box 950. .

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guides the player, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are rotated by the ball firing device 680 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the interest of the player can be increased by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front by exploding. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing the exploded view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. , And a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that extend to the right. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Also, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same. Have been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably mounted.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 having both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position closer to the left from the left and right center, A right sliding member 82 in the form of a flat plate attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, or the like), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch 11 which penetrates vertically and is depressed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, an upper left and right fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. In addition, the upper frame member 10 includes, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view, a mounting step portion 12 that is recessed from the general surface. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 has the right and left lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses formed to be the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths are the same. Is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are depressed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, a lower left and right fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 has a front end notch portion 22 that is recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same size as the front-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetric shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are depressed inward on the side surface outside in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end. The recesses 31 and 41 include projections 32 and 42 that bulge out of the side surface opposite to the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow interior. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. In the protruding portions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on the surface. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game hall or transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by fingers and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is opened. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a front surface bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, which will be described later, when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state where it is assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined such that the front end side is lower. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting a right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice shape, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has an upper fixing portion 61 having a rectangular shape and a quadrangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the right and left center of the front extending portion 62 from the right end of the front extending portion 62 to the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A horizontal fixing portion 64 having a flat plate shape extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end portion extending from the left end to the front end of the front extension portion 62 to a portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). I have. The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state where the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the concave portion 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 allows the main frame 4 to cooperate with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66 a extending right and left with a predetermined width on the left and right, and an operation unit protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then extending diagonally left forward, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is mounted at a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. In a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The distal end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a, in which a main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 described later can be accommodated.

  By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands up horizontally from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. An upright flat rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a vertically penetrating horizontal portion 71 allowing only one game ball to pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is provided. Are fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) of the main frame 4 at the main frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 74 coincide with the left discharge holes 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided to be separated from each other in the front and rear directions. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of contacting the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and are fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front sides of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is screwed into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. By this, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is lower than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower left and right fixing members 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. You.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main frame is detached from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member was attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the lock member on the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the distal end of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a U-shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 according to the present embodiment includes the front end of the lock body 66a in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. Of the lock body 66a (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65). In the normal shaft support state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in a diagonal direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal pivoting state, since the hinge pin 622 on the body frame that supports the heavy body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin on the body frame is There is almost no load on the front end face of the lock body 66a from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. I have. In the figure, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the U-shaped bearing groove 63 and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F, a component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame and the front end face of the arc shape; And the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (the mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging part 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame moves the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is subjected to the normal pin support state or the action force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. This prevents the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and prevents the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from dropping out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move rightward, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the hanging portion 65 and Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  In addition, even if the shape of the front end face of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 is directed outward of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) of the lock member 66 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is opposed to the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a, which has closed the bearing groove 63, retreats and the bearing groove 63 is opened, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is urged by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves rightward, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame is accommodated in a space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked).

  When removing the upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. Thus, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball security for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1. The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to a left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (the pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when an invalid tool that has contacted the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the invalid tool to be bent. Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, in the case where the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game sphere is placed on the outer frame side while the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not ejected rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 May be trapped between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which game balls can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between them.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and the outer frame 2 is not closed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like, the door frame 3 is attached to a square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a lower right front corner of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 mounted on the front left of the door frame 100; a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320; Door frame top mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later. And a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and mounted on upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 when viewed from the front, and mounted rotatably on the body frame 4 with hinges. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the gap, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 And a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been fired by the firing device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges the ball to the lower plate 322.

  As will be described later in detail, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to rotate the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with different strength.

  The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later in detail, but is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface swells forward, The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball pull-out button 327 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and within the range of the cash or the prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card deducted from the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and a cash input to the ball lending machine Ball return display section 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards and the like, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 capable of accepting a player's operation at the time of effect presentation, and a lower plate. Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and allows the player to perform a pressing operation and presents an effect image to the player. Is what you can do. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by a player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display an effect image. And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of light emitting decoration.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. The right outside of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 projects farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a front end. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570 has a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front, and left and right sides of the top decoration member 576, which will be described in detail later. A decorative top left decorative lens member 579 and a decorative top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can make the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 emit light.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) such that the left side of the front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating forward and backward as shown in FIGS. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, which project forward from the door frame base 110 to form the body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640; A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 mounted rotatably on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the front of the door frame base 110 in front view, and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111; a security cover 200 that covers a lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190; and an open / close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , An upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying connection between the body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the through hole 111, the upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Accordingly, the entire door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape by the through-holes 111 penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end, a handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. Between the front and rear sides of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210, the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached. The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth from the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passage opening 116 and the through-hole passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 face forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in a front view. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both right and left sides of the door frame base 110. And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along an upper side of a rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcing member attached to a lower side of the through-hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in front view of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The locking unit 135 includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and that locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, both left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to respective upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a cutout portion 132a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The parts enhance the strength and rigidity, and also prevent unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided on the door frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a vertically separated from each other. The door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions, and the door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions. And a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. And a disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the two and a door frame hinge pin 142 interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. And a lock spring 144 that urges the upper hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape that is open forward when viewed from the side. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece for connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on a rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a bent horizontally. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower projecting piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted. The upper end of the lock spring 144 contacts the flange member 143, and the lower end of the lock spring 144 contacts the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward through the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and a horizontally bent portion at a lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is a lower projecting portion. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided when the operator holds a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, and the door frame The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can insert or pull out the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620. Can be. By inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is viewed. The main frame 4 can be rotatably supported by the hinge.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is configured such that a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 which is supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. And a column-shaped hinge pin 152 below the door frame (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the flat extending piece 151a that extends horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L-shape. In the hinge bracket 151 below the door frame, a mounting piece (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The hinge pin 152 below the door frame has a lower end formed in a truncated cone shape that tapers downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in a front view. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. Decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame, and lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extending up and down from the lower position of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to almost the same height as the lower end of the passage 117 for the upper plate. And a substrate 162.

  The upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 162 on the left side of the door frame of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface, respectively, which can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind a door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for removably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disc-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protruding portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In this state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the projection 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 to restrict the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

  Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. . Thus, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the state is stabilized in a state where the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position where it protrudes downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the protruding portion 172. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated such that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protrusion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182, and a plurality of annular flange portions 182 protruding into the tubular portion 181 and extending over the entire length of the tubular portion 181 in the axial direction and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three) are provided with ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181. .

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where the handle unit 300 is similarly tilted so that the axis of 181 extends rightward and forward.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 attached to two transparent glass plates 192. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward from a position lower than the upper left and right upper corners in a flat plate shape, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from behind the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. Is attached to the door frame base 110 by making contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 190 is detachable from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 has a flat main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201, and is spaced apart in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

  Note that the rear protruding piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, game balls passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (game balls fired by the ball firing device 680) do not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200, and the game ball 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball being driven into the game.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and projects from the lower side of the main body 201 to the rear. The removed rear projection 202 is inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state where the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening / closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extends forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting the key lock 710 to the key cylinder 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (the reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, it can be either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape projecting forward in plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate parts 213c extending in a plate shape in a direction away from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 from the rear at a position substantially at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. As for a pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the left mounting plate portion 213c in the front view is mounted on the right end portion of the middle reinforcing plate 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the right mounting plate portion 213c in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thus, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate part 213a and the pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is inserted through the front side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes rearward. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feed unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front with the ball feeding unit exploded, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launching device 680 one by one, and converts the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 into the upper plate balls. The lower tray can be pulled out by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110, and penetrate in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b opening below the entrance 251a, and having a box-shaped front cover 251 and a box having a front end opened and a rear end closed. A rear cover 252 having a hit ball supply port 252a for supplying game balls entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launching device 680, and the rear cover 252 and the front cover. The partition 253 is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and a partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b behind the front cover 251. And the game balls on the partition 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and are vertically moved between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. The ball feeding member 254 rotatably supported around the extended axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  In the ball feeding unit 250, as shown in the drawing, a ball feeding member 254 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 251a in a front view, and a ball punching member 253 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. A ball feeding solenoid 255 is disposed on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feed unit 250 has an arc-shaped slit 251c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball-pulling member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251b in a front view. The operation rod 253c of the ball-pulling member 253 described later extends forward. The front cover 251 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball empty guide path 323f of the plate unit base 323. It is formed so that the part that is opened rearward on the end side is closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 253 has a partition part 253a below the entrance 251a, between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, the upper surface of which is lower toward the ball feeding member 254, and a ball of the partition 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and the lower end turns around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable supporting rod 253b, a rod-shaped operating rod 253c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 253b, and a lower side than the operating rod 253c from the side of the rotating rod 253b. A weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253c is in contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by pressing the upper bowl removing button 327 of the bowl unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a blocking portion 254a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 251a and the partition portion 253a of the ball removing member 253, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. And a ball holding portion 254b which is depressed in an arc shape toward the rotation axis and a rod-shaped rod portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the rotation axis when the rod 254c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis is moved left and right by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a supply position where the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and a ball holding portion 254b that faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hit ball supply port 252a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position facing the side. When the ball feeding member 254 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and the game ball enters the partition 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the movement to the ball holding unit 254b (hit ball supply port 252a) side is blocked by the blocking unit 254a, and the ball stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the rod 254c side closes the hit ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 250 is moved forward and backward by the ball feeding operating rod 256 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 256 which swings up and down. And a ball feed crank 257 that turns the ball feed member 254 about the axis that extends in the vertical direction while rotating about the axis that extends in the direction. The ball-feeding crank 257 is configured to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball-feeding operation rod 256 and extend in the left-right direction. A shaft portion 257b disposed on the opposite side and rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b to feed the ball; And a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the member 254.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 256 that swings by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves up and down by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 to cause the ball feed member 254 to move. Can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding operation rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255 and its tip is positioned downward. It is in the state located at. When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball-feeding operation rod 256 is sucked by the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball-feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state). Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 682.

  In addition, the ball-pulling member 253 rotatably supported in the ball-feeding unit 250 receives a moment to rotate in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the weight portion 253d, but projects forward. The rotation of the operating rod 253c is restricted by the contact of the operating rod 253c with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a operated by the pressing operation of the upper ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320. Is partitioned between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, and the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  Then, when the player pushes down the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves downward. As a result, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partitioning portion 253a is released. Is done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  In addition, since the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 327b in which the operation transmission part 327a with which the operating rod 253c of the ball-pulling member 253 contacts is formed, it is urged upward by the upper counter-ball-pulling spring 327c. Even if the game ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removing member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 253a.

  The ball feeding unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feed unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The anti-fraud member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape when viewed from the front extends left and right, and is separated vertically from the right side by a predetermined distance from the right side to the upper side in the vertical direction at the center, and A lower piece 262 and an inclined portion 263 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 are provided. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. Thus, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that spreads rightward.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment concave portion 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 260, a fraudulent game ball to which a string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 680 from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250, and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When a string is operated to perform an illegal act of causing an unauthorized game ball to be taken in and out of the first left starting port 2002a or the like, the force of the unauthorized game ball fired (hit) by the ball firing device 680 causes After the string attached to the illegal game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, the V-shaped narrowing formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 is performed. It can be cut by the part which has been broken, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball to which a string is attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown, the foul cover unit 270 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 with an open front side, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272. Fail cover unit 270 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the normal guide path 861 of lower full tank path unit 860 of main body frame 4 and upper plate ball supply port 323a of plate unit 320. A full tank receiving port 274 which is open rearward at the lower right side of the passage 273 and the through ball path 273 in a front view and which can communicate with the full guiding path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And

  Further, foul cover unit 270 is opened upward on the right side in front view of full tank receiving port 274 and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 680 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (a foul ball), and a game ball received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 which opens forward near the lower right corner in front view. And a ball discharge port 276 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full ball reception port 274 and the foul ball reception port 275 and the ball discharge port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the cover member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A large-sized storage passage 277, a plate-shaped movable piece 278 that forms a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277, and has a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 for urging the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 becomes full of game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, a certain number of the foul cover units 270 are stored in the storage passage 277. Game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game ball. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. Accordingly, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and when the full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the further payout of the game balls is stopped, and That fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and can be prompted to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 322.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and is a guideway opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 860 in the below-described payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4. 863 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 281 to which the operating projection 863e can contact (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact. When the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates, and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player so that a game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 at the rear side of the handle 302, and a handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 to the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, the handle base 301 and the inner A handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 so as to return the handle 302 to an initial rotational position (a rotational end in a counterclockwise direction in front view). One end is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307 a of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise in front view through the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 urged in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side is outward from the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 301. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304. A single button 311 attached to the base 301 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 312 attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 311. I have.

  The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 has a cylindrical base portion 301a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b projecting radially from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a concave portion from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three grooves 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. The three grooves 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Accordingly, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three grooves 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, and the ridges 183 are respectively formed in the three grooves 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, and the other end of the handle return spring 308 is locked. Locking protrusion 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a is formed such that a side surface in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 302a is located on the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second protrusion 302b is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a by a clockwise rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 302b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first projection 302a.

  The third protrusion 302c is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees clockwise, and It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 302c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gradually inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c by a clockwise rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d has a side surface on both sides inclined substantially linearly, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a that are rounded at the center of the front surface and bulged forward, and protrude rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front, and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined such that the right end side is located rearward from the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached via the outside is also inclined outwardly in plan view (in other words, the tip end is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. Thus, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform the rotating operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball firing device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is hit into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are plated with a conductive material. When the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like, the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled so that a game ball can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in any way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball may be hit. I cannot do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while the player rotates the handle 302, the single-button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311 and the firing unit of the payout control board 951 (shown in FIG. ), The rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. Accordingly, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311 is performed by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311. The game ball can be driven into the game area 5a again with the strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most clockwise in a front view. When the game ball is hit most strongly in the game area 5a (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 302d is positioned at the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated. By changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 at the “right-handed” position in a comfortable state, It is possible to reduce the fatigue of the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the player hits right during the normal game state, it is difficult to accept the game balls in the various entrances in spite of the large consumption of the holding balls. This is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of hitting.

[3-3. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41A is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front left. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The plate unit 320 is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320.

  The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a plate unit base 323 mounted on the upper front of the plate unit base 323. An upper plate main body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and a lower plate main body 325 attached to the lower left portion of the front of the plate unit base 323 from the left and right centers and swelling greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325.

  The dish unit 320 has an upper dish ball removing button 327 attached to the upper plate 321 on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 so as to be operable to be pressed from above on the right side of the upper dish 321 and a front view of the upper dish ball removing button 327. A ball lending button 328 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side in front view of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328 A ball return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and a plate front upper decorative portion 326b in front of the upper plate 321 and in front of the plate unit cover 326. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and protrude forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. And has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side bulges forward more than the left and right center in front view, and is formed in a container shape opened upward. Have been. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion which is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The upper plate 321 has a front end receding rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and has a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. I have. The upper plate 321 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 321a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a in front view is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate supply port 323 a of the plate unit base 323 to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323 d. Are inclined so as to be lower toward the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thereby, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be stored in the upper plate from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a whose depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower decreases downward. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is mounted. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding member 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and is contacted (rolled) by the game ball to form the game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 322 is disposed below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball hole 322a which penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a and is capable of discharging game balls, and a plate unit cover 326. And a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the provided effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is concave in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 that is open at the top and rear, a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate main body 325 from the left end side, and a lower plate main body 325. And a lower plate cover 340 that covers a portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a trapezoidal shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view is a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrilateral is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. , And the left and right sides of the trapezoid that extend obliquely are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from an outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 325a excluding a rear end side, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower saucer hole 322a penetrating up and down in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right, and a front side of the rectangular shape is formed as a bottom side, and an upper side shorter than the base side is disposed on the front side, and the left and right sides that are obliquely extended are curved so as to be recessed backward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid and a trapezoid. (The upper surface of) the bottom wall portion 325a is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower countersunk hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate hole 322a is formed at a position closer to the right than the center in the left-right direction of the lower plate body 325 (bottom wall 325a). In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portions at the front right corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b correspond to the escape portion 322b.

  The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the right half above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, the lower plate cover 340 includes a cover standing wall portion 340a that rises upward from an upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and a substantially lower end from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. And a ceiling part 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to a rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. The front end (left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower dish cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and a portion extending obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. I have.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (production operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in front view of a portion extending short to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the production operation unit 400 in front view. Is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half goes around the effect operation unit 400. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatched area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 described later, and a lower plate. The lower plate second region A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located on the right side of the opening 326d (behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Region). In other words, the lower plate 322 has at least half of a storage area (equivalent to a storage area in a plan view, a combined area of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which game balls can be stored, It is located behind the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area indicated by the dotted line is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall is opened on the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction in front view. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326 (to the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d), and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. The lower plate is disposed in the lower second plate area A2 at the rear side. Thus, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower counter ball supply port 323c is invisible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Accordingly, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to go down from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (plate unit cover 326) bulging forward toward the rear of the rendering operation unit 400, The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the lower plate second region A2 is larger than the lower plate first region A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (the player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, the lower plate 322 is such that the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second area A2) has the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326 as shown in FIG. ), A lower plate cover 340 covers an upper side of a portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower plate 322 has a lower plate hole 322a vertically penetrating in front of the lower plate supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower plate hole 322a. The lower plate ball removing hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is closed by a cover member 334 that is opened and closed by operating a pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball hole 322a is closed by the cover member 334, so that game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322. When the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower bowl button 333, the game balls in the lower bowl 322 can be discharged from the lower bowl hole 322a below the bowl unit 320.

  The lower plate hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is disposed in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate supply port 323 c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, the lower plate hole 322 a is located on the right side of the lower plate opening 326 d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400. It is invisible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 has an outer peripheral shape formed by combining a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed on the front side of a square extending left and right, and a bottom plate having a lower plate hole 322a. It is inclined to become lower toward. Therefore, in the state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is open, the game ball supplied from the lower bowl supply port 323c into the lower bowl 322 is placed directly in front of the lower bowl supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward through the opened lower countersunk hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower bowl supply port 323c, when the lower bowl extraction hole 322a is open, the lower bowl supply hole 322a is open. The game balls supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 do not directly flow to the region on the left side of the lower plate hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and are discharged from the lower plate hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower bowl input hole 322c is located to the left of the right end of the lower bowl supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower bowl 322 from near the right end of the lower bowl supply port 323c. The ball comes into contact with a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. The right standing wall of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate hole 322a. When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower hole 322a without going to the left side of the lower hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate hole 322a, the lower plate hole 322a is formed. Is open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c do not enter the area on the left side of the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a of the lower dish 322, but immediately from the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower bowl extracting hole 322a is kept open, the game balls flowing on the lower bowl 322 cannot be seen from the player side, and the ball is paid out from the upper bowl 321 or the payout device 830. An illusion that a game ball or the like is directly discharged to a dollar box can be made to be an illusion, and it is difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. And effect images, etc.) to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game balls supplied to the inside of the lower plate 322 bounce and jump, the game balls can be prevented from entering the mounting space 326j from the lower plate 322, and the game balls in the lower plate 322 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from contacting the rear side. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are prevented from contacting or pressing the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). This can prevent the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged by the game ball.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate hole 322a in front of the lower ball supply hole 323c, the lower plate 322 is released from the lower plate supply hole 323c when the lower plate hole 322a is open. It is possible to cause the played game balls to directly enter the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and discharge the balls downward (dollar box), so that the game balls are less likely to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325. Can be. In addition, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls released into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and break them. Can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower countersunk hole 322a may be linked to the upper countersunk button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. The paper is discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong illusion to the player that the game balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described operational effects can be further exhibited. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are shown as separate bodies that can be disassembled, but the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Also, an example in which the cover standing wall 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main plate standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is shown. The cover standing wall portion 340a may rise. In addition, although an example is shown in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is connected to the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the relief portion 322b for avoiding contact of the lower plate 322 with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is provided, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. The lower plate 322 may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the like) has a uniform planar shape without a through hole, but a plurality of penetrating holes through which game balls cannot pass. It may be one having a hole formed. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall 325a, the main body standing wall 325b, the cover standing wall 340a, the ceiling 340b, and the like of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It may be formed in a shape or a net. Note that a light-emitting body such as an LED may be arranged in the plate unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j), and the inside of the lower plate 322 may be illuminated (light-emitting decoration) through a fence-like or mesh-like gap of the lower plate 322. .

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, the four members may be integrally combined in an appropriate combination to form the lower plate 322. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate unit cover 326 are integrated. An integrated one, a lower plate cover 340 and a plate unit base 323 integrated, a lower plate main body 325 and a plate unit base 323 integrated, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326; Are integrated, the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guiding part of lower plate]
An embodiment in which the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is provided with a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding game balls from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is a description schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a different ball guiding portion than that of FIG. FIG. 8C is an explanatory view schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guiding section. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46A, the diameter of the lower plate hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 between the lower plate supply hole 323c and the lower hole 322a. It has a pair of ball guiding portions 322c that are arranged left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c is formed in a rail shape (ridge) extending forward and backward while protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the lower plate 322 is inclined such that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower bowl supply port 323c into the lower bowl 322 is guided to the lower bowl extracting hole 322a by the pair of ball guiding parts 322c without going over the ball guiding part 322c, It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  Similarly, the lower plate 322 of this example has a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball in the rear (lower plate second area A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the lower dish cover 340. It is invisible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower dish 322 of the present example is provided with the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c in a state where the lower dish extraction hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 into the region on the left side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, the illusion that the upper plate 321 and the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, so that the player can concentrate on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image) to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be.

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the ball guiding portion 322c has a rail shape, but the ball guiding portion 322c is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to be able to be guided to the countersunk hole 322a.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged diagonally forward right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c passes through the right wall of the lower plate hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The ball is formed in such a shape as to reflect in the direction of the lower bowl extraction hole 322a, and is provided with a buffer 322d at a position where the game ball contacts. This buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam, or the like.

  In the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also provided with a lower plate hole 322a in front of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game balls released straight forward from the lower bowl supply port 323c are directly discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower bowl removing hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower bowl feeding port 323c is reflected by the buffer 322d in the direction of the lower bowl extracting hole 322a, and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower bowl extracting hole 322a. Is done. At this time, since the game ball comes into contact with the buffer 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the rendering operation unit 400 and the rendering operation in the plate unit cover 326 which are the lower plate second area A2). It is disposed behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and is not visible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present example includes the buffer portion 322d on the wall that reflects the game ball, even when the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c, The buffer portion 322d allows the sound to be reflected in the direction of the lower bowl drain hole 322a without sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls and the like dispensed from the upper plate 321 and the dispensing device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls from the lower plate 322 is not heard, so that the ball is directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image) to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  Next, an example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46C is a portion of the lower surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 opposite to the lower plate supply port 323c with the lower plate hole 322a interposed therebetween. And a return portion 322e that reflects the game ball, which protrudes upward from the lower ball piercing hole 322a and jumps over the lower ball piercing hole 322a, toward the lower ball piercing hole 322a. The return portion 322e may be made of the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may be made of a cushioning material such as rubber or foam, which alleviates a collision sound at the time of reflection. Further, the return portion 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower plate 322 or may constitute a part of the side wall of the lower plate 322 (the main body standing wall portion 325b).

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c, a lower plate ball hole 322a, and a return portion 322e are arranged linearly in order from the rear to the front, and the lower plate 326 of the plate unit cover 326. Behind the opening wall 326d on the right side (behind the cover wall such as the effect operation unit 400, which is the lower plate second area A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is arranged and cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if a game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball hole 322a, the return portion 322e forms the lower ball hole 322a side. And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower countersunk hole 322a. Therefore, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described ball guiding section 322c and the buffer section 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate which can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) schematically shows a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded in accordance with the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) by a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2. In FIG. 47, the area indicated by the dotted hatching indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

  First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47A constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball hole 322a. It has a main body 325A and a first extension 325B attached to the right side of the main body 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower second plate area A2. The first additional portion 325B is further provided with the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is accommodated (the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). (Space behind). As shown, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. In addition, the first extension portion 325B has a relief portion 322b at the right front corner for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

  Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the rendering operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is thus less than the example of FIG. 47 (a). The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is large. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) includes a lower plate first region A1 and a part of the lower plate second region A2, and a main body 325A having a lower plate ball hole 322a. A second extension 325C, which is attached to the right side of the portion 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, is larger than the first extension 325B. As shown in the drawing, the second extension 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension 325B. The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension 325C (see FIG. 47 (c)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C to the main body 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communicated), and the storage area of the game balls is provided. Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C of the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (between the mounting space 326j) between the effect operation unit 400 and the rear surface of the second effect operation unit 400A. (Space).

  As described above, in the above example, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable. The storage area can be made larger or smaller as needed. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, it projects to the rear (in the mounting space 326j) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. An extension portion (first extension portion 325B or second extension portion 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above-described embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). It may be arranged on the boundary between the first plate area A1 and the second lower dish area A2, or may be arranged in the first lower dish area A1.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate hole 322a in the main body 325A. A lower countersunk hole 322a may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are mounted on the right side of the main body 325A of the lower plate main body 325. A flat closing member having no storage area may be attached.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 323 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear portion is open). (Shallow box shape).

  The plate unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view and extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper plate ball supply port 323a. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating back and forth in a lower portion on the left side from the left and right center in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; An upper dish ball feed port 323d, which penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 323c and extends vertically and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper dish main body 324, is provided.

  Further, the dish unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding game balls sent to the rear side of the dish unit base 323 through the upper dish ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250; After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guide path 323e, it extends in a substantially L-shape so as to become lower toward the right side of the cylindrical shape of the lower dish ball supply port 323c when viewed from the front. A ball guiding path 323f that guides the released game balls to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a lower end of the ball feeding guiding path 323e and a lower end of the ball feeding guiding path 323e and an upper end of the ball drawing guiding path 323f. And an operation transmitting portion 327a which is in contact with the operation rod 253c of the ball feed unit 250 and is operated by the upper countersunk button 327 projects backward so as to face rearward. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The downstream end of the ball guide path 323f is open in a cylindrical portion of the lower counter ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view, and has a handle insertion opening 323h through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 is open to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the cylindrical rear end is the upper plate passage port of the door frame base 110. 117 penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  When the lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 322, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the lower tray passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. And is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, game balls flowing in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower dish ball supply port 323c is disposed behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside the lower dish opening 326d) in the dish unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower dish cover 340, and the like. When viewed from the front, the door frame 3 is invisible from the player through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325. The plate unit cover 326 has a center in the left-right direction that swells forward, and has a large opening forward in the center in the left-right direction. An upper plate front decorative portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a lower plate front decorative portion 326c formed below each of the left and right upper plate front decorative portions 326b. I have.

  The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the up-down direction is substantially the same as the height of the plate unit 320 in the up-down direction. It is formed at the height. The effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined so that the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front plate upper decorative portion 326b has a front surface that moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction to both left and right sides of the plate unit cover 326, and ends at the center in the left-right direction and both left and right sides of the plate unit cover 326. An intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape slightly bulging forward with respect to a plane connecting the ends of the first and second portions. Further, the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined such that the lower end moves upward from the left-right center to the left-right end of the plate unit cover 326, and the left-right center of the plate unit cover 326 ( It is formed so that the up-down direction is narrowed from the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a side) to both left and right sides. In the plate unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the upper front plate decoration portion 326b on the left side in front view.

  The front lower part of the dish unit 326c moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and right ends of the dish unit cover 326, and the left and right ends of the center of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape depressed rearward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions of the first and second portions.

  A lower plate opening 326d penetrating front and rear is formed in the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. A lower speaker opening 326e made of punched metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side as viewed from the front. The lower speaker opening 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the plate unit base 323 when assembled to the plate unit 320.

  A handle insertion opening 326f that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view and through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the lower decorative portion 326c on the right side in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion opening 326f near the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, is formed.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate 326h It covers the upper right side. The top plate portion 326h is provided with a top ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display portion 330.

  The plate unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the lower plate front decoration portion 326c to the front surface of the plate unit base 323. The bottom of the plate unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape such that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed upward from below, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. In the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole vertically penetrating is formed at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

  The dish unit cover 326 has a mounting space 326j that opens forward at the portion of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). The plate unit cover 326 extends rearward from the left and upper sides of the lower plate opening 326d in a flat plate shape, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover portion 326k is configured such that the left end of the lower plate main body 325 is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b, and the right end is in contact with the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340. I have.

[3-3e. Button for removing the upper plate ball]
The upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 when viewed from the front, and by pressing the game ball in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate removing button 327 is not illustrated in detail, but the rear end side is below the top plate 326h by a ball removing button holder attached below the top plate 326h of the plate unit cover 326. Is mounted so as to be rotatable about an axis extending therethrough. The upper ball removing button 327 has an upper end of a vertically extending ball removing lever in contact with the lower surface of the front end thereof. The ball-pull lever is mounted slidably in the up-down direction by a ball-pull base attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 below the plate-pull button 327.

  The ball-pulling lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the ball-pulling button 327 comes into contact with the upper part of the ball-pulling slider 327b, which is slidable up and down by the plate unit base 323, from above. ing. The upper counter ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmitting portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmitting portion 327a is moved from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face and contacts the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The slider 327b is urged upward by a spring 327c, and the biasing force of the spring 327c causes the slider 327b and the lever to remove the ball. The upper bowl removing button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Accordingly, when the upper counter-ball-pulling button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper counter-ball-pulling-out spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 327b moves downward and the operation transmitting portion 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 which is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, so that they are in communication with each other. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and discharged to the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. (Supply).

  Note that, when the upper bowl removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 that closes the lower bowl removing hole 322a may move in conjunction with it. As a result, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. The paper is discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong illusion to the player that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and by making it difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by focusing the player on a game (such as a game ball hitting operation and an effect image). Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display section 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. As illustrated, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display unit 330 are inside a circular decoration on the right side of the top plate ball removal button 327 on the top plate 326h of the plate unit cover 326 when viewed from the front. Mounted on

  The ball lending button 328 is used to push a cash or prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and press the ball lending machine to play a predetermined number of game balls. It is lent (paid out) to the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed when the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after deducting the lending game ball.

  Although illustration is omitted, a three-digit seven-segment LED is disposed below the transparent surface of the ball lending display unit 330, and the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or An error code when the ball rental machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Direction selection left button and Direction selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end near the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the upper front plate decoration portion 326b on the left side in front view. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed leftward. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward to the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided to the player on the game board side effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. When an effect image prompting selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and the desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. .

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower tray ball removal button 333 of the tray unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the front lower end of the lower front plate decoration portion 326c on the left side in front view below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. By pressing the lower bowl removing button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower bowl removing hole 322a of the lower bowl 322 can be rotated. The lower plate hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

  The lower plate removing button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower plate removing base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 below the lower plate main body 325. Mounted on The lower bowl removing button 333 is disposed on the left side of the lower bowl removing hole 322a of the lower bowl 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The lower plate base 335 has a bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326 so that the bottom plate 326i is accommodated in a stepped portion that is recessed upward from below at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the part 326i. The lower bowl draining base 335 has a discharge hole 335a that is the same size as the lower bowl draining hole 322a and is vertically penetrated at a position directly below the lower bowl draining hole 322a. . Although not shown in detail, the cover member 334 is disposed between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball-pulling base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 closing the lower plate hole 322a is opened, the outlet 335a of the lower plate base 335 is also opened, and the lower hole 322a and the outlet 335a are opened. Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the cover member 334 is attached to the lower bowl removing base 335 so as to be rotatable about a position to the left of the lower bowl removing button 333 in plan view. The lower ball removing button 333 is connected to a portion between a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower ball removing hole 322 a and a portion rotatably mounted by the lower ball removing base 335. Thereby, when the lower countersunk ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically and the lower countersunk ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the holding device for holding the lower plate ball release button 333 when the lower plate ball release button 333 is pressed and moved backward, and a lower plate ball release button And a lower countersunk ball release spring that urges 333 forward. In a state in which the lower ball pull-out button 333 protrudes forward and the lower ball pull-out hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower ball pull-out button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 turns. As a result, the lower bowl removing hole 322a is opened, and the lower bowl removing button 333 is held by the holding device, so that it is kept moving backward. In this state, even if the button 333 is released, the button 333 does not move forward, and the hole 322a for opening the ball 322 is kept open. The game balls in 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, in a state where the lower countersunk ball removing button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower countersunk ball extracting hole 322a is open, when the lower countersunk ball extracting button 333 is pressed backward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the lower plate release button 333 is released, the lower plate release button 333 is moved forward by the urging force of the lower plate release spring, returns to a protruding state, and the cover member 334 is turned. Then, the lower tray hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thereby, game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition, separately from the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removing hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is also movable by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327. The lower plate hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when the player wants to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, the user only needs to operate the upper plate ball removal button 327 and the dollar box through the lower plate 322. And the trouble associated with emptying the ball can be simplified. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 51 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction, and allows the player to perform a pressing operation and present a rendering image to the player. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, a central side excluding an outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and the operation button 410 is capable of being pressed by a player, and an effect operation unit of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 mounted on the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation buttons 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front surface, and mounted on the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image, Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from behind. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller in diameter than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is formed transparent at a center side excluding an outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center swells forward, and a front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. In addition, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a row extending within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction, extending on the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed in a circular arc cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decoration part 411a. And a plurality of (six) second button decorations 411b provided.

  As illustrated, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group of left and right sides is a group of upper and lower sides. It extends longer toward the center than it does.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and is formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front surface is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light at the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b due to the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from a front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detecting pieces 413d projecting rearward in a strip shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a predetermined length along the outer periphery, penetrating the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a. A base opening 413e extending in the circumferential direction and having a plurality of (six) formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners at the top, bottom, left and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide bosses 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detecting pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

  The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are depressed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inside extension 413f has an inside diameter of the front end narrowed inward substantially matching the inside diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed transparent, and a door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. Can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 includes an operation button spring 438 having four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430 and being inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward. The operation button 410 is further restricted from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 when the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. , The rear end moves backward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. By the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440, the operation button 410 is operated.

  Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side of the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a can make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that can be viewed from the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  When the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (the main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is higher than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It becomes a state protruding backward. Thereby, the light emitted forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is It is possible to prevent the base unit 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and at the same time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner part of the base unit 430 Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside of the button base 413 to the outside. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430 It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being illuminated and decorated other than the part targeted for luminous decoration, and to perform luminous decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the rear, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. I have.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and penetrates forward and backward on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a and has a central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is provided. The center opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the diameter of the operation button 410 on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be brought into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

  The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, respectively, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. In a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420, respectively. And partitions between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward at upper portions on both right and left sides of the outer periphery and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 has a metal covering substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a therebetween. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416, three from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface with no irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The outer shape of the frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a are provided in the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted on the frame top lens 418 can emit light. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit, as viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 has an inner peripheral side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer peripheral side larger than the outer diameter of the flange part 413b of the button base 413. Further, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421, and an inner peripheral surface of the substrate base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and an inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Accordingly, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. At the same time, the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b allows only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 to emit light.

  In addition, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view showing the base unit of the effect operation unit in an exploded state as viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the staging operation unit viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the staging operation unit 400 has the operation buttons 410 attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

  The base unit 430 has four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and extending vertically in the center and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape, and blind holes opened forward outside the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a light-transmissive operation button decoration member 432 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431 so as to cover the through hole 431a, and extending short and longitudinally in a tubular manner; The operation button left inner decoration board 433 and the operation button right inner decoration board 434 and the operation button inner decoration board 434 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431 a in the front of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432, respectively. At the rear, the operation attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. The three pressing detection sensors 440 respectively attached to the 439 and detecting the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. And a relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and has a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through-hole 431a has a size that fits inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed in a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners of the operation button 410 outside the through hole 431a. The holding hole 431b has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss 413c, and the guide boss 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b extends from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. The upper right holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. .

  The unit base 431 has a light-shielding wall portion 431c which protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from a portion on the upper front surface between a portion where the inner decorative board 435 on the operation button is mounted and a portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is mounted. It has. With this light shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

  The decoration member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape such that a substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending short in the front-rear direction and a front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c extending vertically through the front plate portion 432b, a flange portion 432d extending outward from a rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that protrude rearward from the unit base 431 and are mounted on the unit base 431.

  The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the in-operation button decoration member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the decoration member 432 for operation buttons, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed as smooth surfaces without irregularities.

  The in-operation button decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is concave in an arc shape, extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button in-button decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulging in an arc shape, extending in an octagonal shape with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center, and concentric with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center. 432g (see FIG. 63). The second in-button decorative portion 432g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

  The operation button interior decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The interior of the operation button decorating member 432 is made invisible behind clearly by the lens effect of the first button decorating portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button decorating portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. By emitting light, the decoration member 432 in the operation button can be made to emit light. By making the decoration member 432 inside the operation button emit light, the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be made light emission decoration.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437, and the LEDs can emit light, so that the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are full color LEDs, respectively. It has been. The front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are white. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 has a rear end in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431 b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 in a state where the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the unit base 431, three pressing detection sensors 440 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other at the lower left. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b through sensor holders 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

  The production operation unit relay board 441 is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431, on the left side (the right side in the front view) of the through hole 431a in rear view. The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, an inner decoration board 436 below the operation button, a frame top lens decoration board 437, a pressure detection sensor 440, and a door frame side effect display device 460 for relaying the connection with the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. Things.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward in a front view from the lower end of a portion that covers the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg 442a attached to a lower rear part of the unit base 431. When assembled to the door frame 3, the leg 442 a of the relay board cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally, and a leg 442 a between the leg 442 a and the bottom plate 326 i that forms the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. To form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed down or hit, the frame unit 415 is not moved until the lower surface of the leg 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the attachment portion 416e and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted downward, and the effect operation unit attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit cover 326. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 326a and the like, thereby preventing their breakage.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 in the shape of a bottomed rectangular tube. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed in the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is mounted such that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape is in contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In a state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 passes through the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is provided. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the in-operation button decoration member 432, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effects of the production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 51. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which a part of the operation button is cut away and the first button decoration portion of the operation button, a button frame or the like attempts to hide the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part which it is going to hide with the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of an effect operation unit. FIG. 63A is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory diagram of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The rendering operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can display a rendering image to a player according to a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and operate the player. By operating the button 410, the player can participate in the effect presented to the player and entertain it.

  The effect operation unit 400 has an overall height substantially equal to the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than １ ／ of the entire width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Are formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part with respect to the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Installed as Thus, the rendering operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is disposed above the plate unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the user can visually recognize the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation buttons 410 in a good state.

  The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and is urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be moved by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The rear surface of the frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a.

  In the effect operation unit 400, in a normal state, the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 projects forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. I have. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the frame unit It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center portion is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in a conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. Since the center axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above similarly to the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. A part of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is made a flat surface However, if a part deviating from the center of the operation button is pressed, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a position distant from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. Can be. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can smoothly retreat without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to enjoy the operation to be operated sufficiently.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is panned so that the effect operation unit 400 is suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part, since it is mounted on the production operation unit mounting part 326a of the unit cover 326. In addition, the whole of the effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the effect operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively easily perform the pressing operation (the position indicated by the white arrow in FIG. 61), the player who is pressing the operation button 410 can be operated. Strong vibration can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the downward bending of the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the rendering portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or struck with a strong force, for example, when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape protruding forward (a part of a substantially spherical surface), the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. As compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even if the player is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button are composed of transparent members. The decoration by the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button decoration part 432f, the second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side). ). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated. This makes it hard to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the outer peripheral surface of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is located from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the in-operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the in-operation button decoration member 432 within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and the button frame 412 form the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative board unit 420, and the like, which are further outside and on the rear side (rear side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed line is not seen from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the inside decoration member 432 of the operation button are hidden and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410 and, consequently, the overall effect operation unit 400.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411 a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the center axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second in-button decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the in-operation button decoration member 432 disposed inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape with the center axis CL as the center. As shown in FIG. 63, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button internal decorative portion 432g intersect with each other, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction (the direction in which the center axis CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other. With the second button interior decoration section 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction, when the position of the eyes of the player moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a is increased. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g is changed, the player can see the moving decoration and entertain the player.

  In this manner, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since the player can show the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the interest of the player strongly and has a high appeal.

  The effect operation unit 400 includes an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button right inner decoration board 432 inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432. An upper inner decorative board 435 and an operating button lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, the operating button inner decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. In other words, the operation buttons 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation buttons 410 are arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  The effect operation unit 400 is provided behind the second button decoration part 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated. Can be. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board. 423 second LEDs 423b are arranged, and by illuminating the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the effect operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. By making the LED emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. From the lower side of the base unit 431 of the unit base 431 of the unit base 431 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward to near the lower rear end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decorative board 437 does not leak to the operation buttons 410 and the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

[3-4 g. Overall Configuration of Effect Operation Unit in Second Embodiment]
Next, a second effect operation unit 400A as a second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the center axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. FIG. 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along a line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. The second effect operation unit 400A, like the effect operation unit 400, allows the player to perform a pressing operation and can present an effect image to the player. In the following, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as in the effect operation unit 400 are denoted by the same reference numerals and described.

  The second production operation unit 400A has an operation button 410 whose outer shape is circular and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparent, and which can be pressed by the player, and an effect of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame unit 415 having a frame shape attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decoration substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission. A second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a second base unit 450 that can be visually recognized from the player through the operation button 410. The second effect table on the door frame side that is attached to and can display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in a front view are arranged. And a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view so as to cover the same. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A when viewed from the front.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, And relaying the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is transparent at the center excluding the outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side swells forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided. The configuration is substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 have a pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and a guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex at the center of the button lens 411 at a position in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. The button lens 411 in a truss-like pattern and a truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles directed toward one another and a triangle with one vertex directed to the opposite side of the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction in a plurality of rows. , A right-angled triangular pattern composed of a bottom extending toward the center of the button lens 411 from both ends of the bottom, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the bottom. From the hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, the side extending longer than the right triangle pattern from the center of the bottom of the truss pattern triangle to the center of the button lens 411, and the tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration unit 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, each triangle forming the first button decoration portion 411a has a polyhedral shape with its respective surfaces facing different directions. Thereby, while the front side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, the back side is formed in a polyhedral shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. In the part, the thickness of the button lens 411 is complicatedly changed, and light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and is held inside the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Are slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71, and the like. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. And the second effect operation unit 400A.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is mounted, and is mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is something that can be done.

  The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and projects rearward from the front surface of the unit base 451 into four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. And four button shafts 452 each having a cylindrical shape inserted slidably therefrom, and an operation button spring through which each of the four button shafts 452 is inserted to urge the rear end of the guide boss 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown), and three pressing detection sensors 454 attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detecting three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b projecting hemispherically rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that extends vertically when viewed and extends through the cover 451b in the front-rear direction, four holding holes 451d that are recessed rearward from the front of the main body 451a, and a main body 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e recessed in a semicircle (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper portion of the upper portion, and a semicircular shape coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body 451a. A (U-shaped) lower bearing portion 451f and a left and right side of an upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a, and the rotation of the screen unit 470. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner periphery and an outer periphery formed to have substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A rotatably mounted by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f rotates. I have. The through-hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side to pass from behind.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at four upper, lower, left, and right corners of the front surface of the main body 451a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. These holding holes 451d have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, so that the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. A button shaft 452 is mounted in the four holding holes 451d coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. When the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d is inserted into the cylindrical guide boss 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is attached via the guide boss 413c so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Can be.

  The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. The upper right holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, of the four holding holes 451d, two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the two upper holding holes 451d. .

  Further, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively. When the front ends of these operation button springs abut against the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c, the operation button springs are inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. 410 is biased forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open at the front and extends rearward. In the upper bearing 451e and the lower bearing 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular arc are located coaxially. The upper bearing part 451e and the lower bearing part 451f are provided with the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A inserted from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be rotatably supported.

  As for a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451, the front surfaces of the respective front portions pass through the central axes of the semicircular portions of the upper bearing portion 451e whose U-shaped recessed portions are recessed rearward. And are separated from each other in the circumferential direction at a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restrict the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by being brought into contact with the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. I have. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to a 90-degree angle range by the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g.

  Although not shown, a magnet is buried in each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and is magnetically attached to the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, so as to contact the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is hard to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the first position in which the main screen 471 is directed forward or the second position in which the sub-screen 472 is directed forward in the screen unit 470 by the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the screen unit 470 is prevented from rotating by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like, and the door frame side is controlled. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three pressing detection sensors 454 are mounted on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, three pressing detection sensors 454 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 451d, and the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display an effect image to a player through a transparent portion of the operation button 410. The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side includes a screen unit 470 attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f, and a second base unit. An upper bearing member 480 mounted on the upper front of the unit 450 and rotatably mounting the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and mounted on the lower front of the second base unit 450 And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably mounts the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  In addition, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side includes a rotation drive unit 490 mounted on the upper portion of the second base unit 450 by rotating the screen unit 470 and a cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 which is arranged and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a rear surface of the unit base 451 which is mounted with the projector 500 and covers the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 having an open front and a mounting gear member 475 of a screen unit 470 on the left side of the rotary drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front. Upper cover 506 and the upper And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projected and displayed) so as to be visible to the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape and has a milky white translucent main screen 471, a disk-shaped part having one end in the axial direction of the main screen 471 as a part of the outer periphery, and a central part having an axis. A sub-screen 472 which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction outward and has a translucent milky white color, and projects in a columnar shape outwardly in the direction perpendicular to the axis from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475 a formed over substantially half of the outer periphery, and penetrates the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75) formed in a relief shape simulating a transparent and predetermined character (skull); A sub-screen decorative board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) mounted on the back side of the 472 and having a plurality of LEDs 477 a mounted on a surface facing the sub-screen 472, and a side opposite to the sub-screen 472 of the main screen 471. And a semicircular peripheral decoration member 478 that extends shortly from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 has an axial length approximately 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472 a and the peripheral decoration member 478 of the sub-screen 472.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74B). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and has a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction, and closes the inside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a. Curved screen portion 472b. The entire peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape such that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen portion 472b bulges in a direction away from the main screen 471 into a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 from the front, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The operating gear member 475 meshes with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotation drive unit 490 and is formed with gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half a circumference, and protrudes outward from one of circumferential ends of the gear teeth 475a. A stopper 475b, and a detection piece 475c protruding outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 is located in the concave portion 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is concaved in an arc around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 when assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is regulated by contacting the pair of rotation regulating portions 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the concave portion 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that contacts the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It has become.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position in which the main screen 471 is directed forward and a second position in which the sub-screen 472 is directed forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decorative member 476 is formed in a relief shape simulating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness is complicatedly changed, transmitted light is complicatedly refracted, and the rear is visually recognized. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the letter “PUSH” is formed in the relief simulating the skull of the sub-screen decorative member 476.

  The sub-screen decorative board 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so as to form a gap between the sub-screen 472 and a plurality of LEDs 477a on the front side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decorative board 477 has an outer shape smaller than the sub-screen decorative member 476, and has a white surface. By making the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative board 477 can make the “eye” portion of the skull and the character portion of “PUSH” emit light and light by making the LED 477 a emit light.

  The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472, and does not include a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen 472 and the LED 477a. , The LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can be projected on the sub-screen 472 by the projector 500.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and similarly to the peripheral decorative portion 472a, a plurality of square pyramidal irregularities are provided in the circumferential direction of the arc. .

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front sides of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, which are opened forward. It is attached to the front of 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 mounted on the upper part of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing part 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member. And a frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481. The bearing member 481 has a concave portion 481a that is concave in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state assembled in the second production operation unit 400A, and the screen is internally provided. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the concave portion 481a. The concave portion 481a concaved in an arc shape allows the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 to be satisfactorily rotated between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decorative board 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state where it is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. Accordingly, the frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the frame top lens decorative board 482 emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 with the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 is provided. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and has a rotation shaft protruding into the unit case 491. A spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A transmission gear (not shown) is meshed with the first transmission gear and is meshable with the gear teeth 475 a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 in the form of a spur gear.

  The second transmission gear 495 is meshed with the gear teeth 475 a of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 in a state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. Can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector 500 is arranged in a hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector body 501 in a columnar shape and irradiates the effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear part of the projector main body 501 is mounted on the projector mounting member 505, and the lens part 502 and the projector main body 501 are disposed in the cover part 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Mounted as

  The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. This projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal type projector and has an automatic focusing function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector attachment member 505 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front. The projector 500 is mounted inside the projector mounting member 505, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector mounting member 505 can be mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 to cover the cover 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in a state where the projector 500 is inclined so as to match the inclination of the operation button 410. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating back and forth are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second effect operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side of the projector mounting member 505 in a front view.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 while being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees from each other in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 include a detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces forward and a detection piece 475c when the sub screen 472 faces forward. The detection piece 475c at the time can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by the two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The buffer unit 510 is attached to a lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and reduces a shock when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, and a plate unit cover in the plate unit 320. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate 326i.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable flat plate-shaped buffer member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and is in contact with the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 attached to the lower surface of the projector attachment member 505 so as to be relatively accessible.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a in contact with the lower surface of the shock-absorbing member 511, and leg portions protruding downward from both left and right sides of the main body portion 512a in front view and extending in the front-rear direction. 512b. The leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in a state where the leg piece portion 512b is assembled to the door frame 3.

  The buffer unit 510 is configured such that the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 of the buffer unit 510 when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward. To move down. The shock is absorbed by the compression of the buffer member 511. Then, when the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 abuts on the upper surface side of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b of the main body 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member abuts on the upper surface of the main body 512a. When the 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main portion 512a bends, and the shock can be absorbed by the bending of the main portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a bent downward contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the plate unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting unit 416e of the frame unit 415 and the production operation unit mounting unit of the plate unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 326a and the like, thereby preventing their breakage.

[3-4g-7. Operation and effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the center axis | shaft of the operation button extended with the screen facing front. FIG. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) is a view in which the second production operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to be done, (b) shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77 (a) is a view in which the second production operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the center axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to be done, (b) shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button operation in accordance with the game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in the 410 and to allow the player to operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second effect operation unit 400A is formed so that the overall height is substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Also, the second effect operation unit 400A is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than １ ／ of the entire width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit 320, between the lower end of the leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. Thereby, the second effect operation unit 400A changes the center axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) into a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees so as to move upward as it goes forward. Thereby, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the plate unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can reach its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). , And the operation button 410 and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 slide on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be moved by the urging force of the operation button spring. In contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416.

  In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A is arranged such that the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 is forward from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the frame unit It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center portion is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in a conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment are operated. Since the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL inclined relative to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above similarly to the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 separates from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part is pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is made a flat surface However, if a part deviating from the center of the operation button is pressed, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player is pressed forward. When the operation button 410 is depressed at a position distant from the center, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can smoothly retreat without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to enjoy the operation to be operated sufficiently.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the vibration effect motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended as described above. Since only the upper portion is attached to the staging operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. As a result, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the second effect operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below a position where the player can relatively easily press the operation button (near the upper portion of the operation button 410), a strong vibration is applied to the player pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector attachment member 505 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 are provided. The buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that can be elastically deformed, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a on which the cushioning member 511 contacts the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is multi-staged by the elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511 or the bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. It can be absorbed, and it is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the second effect operation unit 400A is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force, for example, when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is presented to the player, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second production operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, the interruption of the game due to the damage can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is compared with a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity of the button lens 411 are increased, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even when the button lens 411 is strongly hit, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are formed of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back side thereof. The decoration by unevenness such as 411a and the second button decoration 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to the center side, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make the rear of the button lens 411 hardly visible at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 due to the uneven decoration combining the triangles. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device on the door frame side. A gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 is located from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap. Can be made difficult to see. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 which can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the player who has seen the operation button 410 can In addition to preventing discomfort, the door effect side display device 460A can be arranged in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like, which are on the rear side (rear side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, and the like, from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in a state where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outside portion (the cross hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76) is not seen from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position where the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the portion outside the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (the cross-hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76). ) Is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are hardly seen. It can be hidden, so that the appearance of the operation buttons 410 and thus the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be improved.

  When the main screen 471 is in the first position facing forward, the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b of the button lens 411, the button frame 412, and the like allow the screen 472b of the sub-screen 472 to move. In addition, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the upper shaft member 473, and the lower shaft member 474 are hard to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub-screen 472, the fact that the main screen 471 is rotatable, and the like. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, the operation By performing a motion that exceeds the player's expectation within the button 410, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the state where the sub-screen 472 is directed to the front, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (the sub-screen decoration member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (the screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain players.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a button lens 411 that allows the user to visually recognize the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. Within the range of a predetermined width, a first button decoration portion 411a in the form of a polyhedron in which a plurality of triangular surfaces are combined is provided, and the second effect display on the door frame side disposed inside and behind the operation button 410. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square pyramids are arranged and a peripheral decorative member 478. As a result, the triangle decoration (first button decoration part 411a) arranged on the front side and the quadrilateral decoration (peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side overlap so as to intersect. As a result, a complicated geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the appearance can be improved to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration 411a mainly composed of a triangle and the peripheral decoration 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 mainly composed of a square are separated in the front-rear direction, so that the player's eyes can be seen. As the position moves, the degree of overlap changes, so that the overlapping geometrical pattern changes, allowing the player to see the moving decoration and the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth. Can be shown to entertain the player.

  Further, in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side arranged behind the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the drive of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward or the sub screen. 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in a state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are vertically extended while being separated to the left and right. The decoration made up of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row forms a geometric pattern decoration that vertically traverses the decoration made up of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Can be shown to players. On the other hand, in a state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a is in a state of being extended in an annular shape, and is an ornament composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern decoration that overlaps the decoration made up of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the change in the decoration attracts the player's interest to the operation button 410 or the decoration of the operation button 410. The change can suggest the arrival of a chance or the like to the player, and can entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen having different switchable screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the display unit includes the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470, it is possible to display an effect image completely different from the effect image display by the liquid crystal display device, and to have a strong impact on the player. Can be entertained. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disk-shaped sub-screen 472 having a relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 at the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided at a rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis in the circumferential direction.

  Then, in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, in a state where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangular (rectangular) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the translucent milky white Through the main screen 471, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the main screen 471 has a smooth semi-cylindrical surface, the effect image has a display screen curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Thus, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Can be recognized, and the player can be surprised, and the player can be noticed on the main screen 471, and the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the center axis of the disk is substantially coincident with the center axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 It can be seen that the sub-screen decorative member 476 imitating a skull is located at the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when an effect image is emitted forward from projector 500 disposed rearward, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of sub-screen 472. By the way, since a flat and opaque sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is applied to the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is shielded, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits light, the light can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen provided at the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be illuminated. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made less visible. The entire side can be brightly decorated with light.

  The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative board 477 to emit light with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on the portion outside the sub-screen decorative member 476 made of a skull-like decoration, and the effect image is displayed. Is decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the luminous decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and a decorative effect completely different from the luminous decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The sub-screen 472 can be shown to the player, giving the player a strong impact. Also, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher brightness) than the brightness of the effected image inside the effected image, so that a partially high-intensity effected image that cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and to display an effect image that makes the player more enjoyable.

  As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Accordingly, the player can see the decoration with a movement and a three-dimensional effect, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power can be provided.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decorative board 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front and the front in the rear of the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412). A second effect display device 460A on the door frame side having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated by the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side.

  Also, the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420, behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a of the operation button 410 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outside decorative board 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated by emitting light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. By causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily emitted and decorated.

  Also, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub-screen 472, and the effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is impossible with the conventional pachinko machine, can be presented to the player. , Can give the player a strong impact and entertain.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 78 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (the door frame left side decorative board 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left part of the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and on the front left side of the through-hole 111, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent member disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and an upper left unit mounted on the front upper portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a tubular frame shape, and extending vertically. The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member to the lower part of the left unit. A left unit lower decorative base 535 projecting forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534, and covering the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and back on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is configured such that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surfaces of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are connected to the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each of the openings 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a in front view corresponding to the circular opening portion 531a in the left unit base 531 and a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening portion 531a. A lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161 a and 162 a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens unit 532 a and the square lens unit 532 b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a front surface and a rear surface formed into a smooth convex lens shape. By the circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be radiated forward in a dot shape. With the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is conically recessed rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c at the front surface. The input lens portion 532e bulging rearward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e generally increases outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 532f that is inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, a groove portion is concavely arcuate backward, and a mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are circumferentially divided by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflector 532f when cut along the radial direction is formed in a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between grooves is pointed backward, and is formed in a saw-like shape. The front reflector 532f is formed such that the groove and the ridge move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflector 532f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with respect to a radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  In the state where the square lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the square lens unit 532b, light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a forward is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel, and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. ), And travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface in the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels outward from the center (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When light that has been reflected from the center side to the outside in the square lens portion 532b substantially in parallel with the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflection portion 532f, the light is reflected forward by the surface of the front reflection portion 532f. Reflects to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction decreases with increasing distance from the center. (See FIG. 81). Thus, the light reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b is sequentially forwardly directed by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f passes through the front diffuser lens 532d and is emitted forward from the square lens 532b. At this time, since the cross-section of the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed in a wavy shape, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b The light can be applied to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

  The square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing the plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc grooves on the dividing line. Are shifted in the radial direction so that concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b forward has a shade of concentric striped pattern. Light can be prevented from being emitted, and more uniform light and shade can be emitted forward. Thus, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  The unillustrated left unit decorative lens member is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffused lens member 532, and the circular decorative portion formed at a position located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffused lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative part formed at the site. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-face decoration part has a plurality of vertically arranged rectangular pyramid-shaped portions on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-face decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-face decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. In addition, the left decorative lens member has a multi-face decorative portion that is forwardly arranged from the square lens portion 532b of the left diffuser lens member 532 by light whose circular decorative portion is irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left diffuser lens member 532. Each of them is illuminated and decorated by the light applied to the light.

  The left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed in a square shape extending in the front-rear direction, with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface of the outer periphery projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The upper decoration base 534 on the left unit is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 has a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined to the rear end such that the upper side moves from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear as it moves upward. The lower unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the up-down direction is depressed rearward, and the lower part is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534, and a left-shaped part. A U-shaped part whose upper part is bent rearward along the front end of the unit lower decoration base 535 is connected to a lower end of the upper U-shaped part and an upper end of the lower U-shaped part. And a linear portion.

  The left and right ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82A is a front view of a door frame right side unit in a door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 85 is a sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 82 (a). FIG. 86 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 82 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a front view right side of the through-hole 111, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The right side decorative board 552 attached to the door frame and the front side of the right side decorative board 552 are attached to the front of the right unit base 551 on the left side from the center in front view, and extend in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member A transparent flat right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, on the right side of the front view center on the front surface of the right unit base 551, and on the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. A right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. I have.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with the front and right sides open. An opaque box-shaped opaque right unit left light blocking member 559 and a light opaque mounted to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559 on the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. And a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover A plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door frame relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 are provided. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape having a long front-rear extension, extending shortly in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Have been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side from the center in the left and right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side from the center in the left and right direction on the front surface, and a center mounted on the front surface in the left and right direction. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. In addition, the right LED 552b is used to decorate the right unit right decoration member 557 with light emission through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for making the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 has white front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is a door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes a plate-shaped main body 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body 553a to the right in a front view in a short plate-like manner. A notch 553c, which is formed in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left from the front view and formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body portion 553a in the front view A housing recess 553d which is shallowly recessed so as to be capable of housing the 554, an input lens portion 553e projecting rearward from the rear end face of the main body 553a, and a plurality of input lens portions 553e provided in the vertical direction. And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction such that the input lens portion 553e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a front end of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 553a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move rightward in front view as moving forward from the rear end side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a projects more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall 553b is in contact with the left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The accommodation recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, it is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending rectangle projects rearward and from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 553e are located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 553e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  The side reflection part 553f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, a surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to a surface of the main body portion 553a, and a surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is a main body portion. 553a extends perpendicular to the plane, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when cut in a radial direction around the input lens portion 553e. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is configured such that light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, and each input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. At the center and diffuse radially forward.

  The main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves rightward in a front view as it goes forward, so that the door frame Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits a flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflection unit 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. Becomes

  The light that has entered the main body 553a forward from the input lens portion 553e is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-blocking member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a has a white color. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body 553a. . Accordingly, from the left surface of the main body 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f in the main body 553a and the light radiated to the right from the side reflector 553f and left on the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 553a is radiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflection portion 553f, after the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left side of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. And more uniform light and shade can be radiated to the left. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodating concave portion 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, a side reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side where the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a in a front view. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection part 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be seen. Can be decorated by the side reflector 553f.

  The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or a logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of the effect is transparent. Is applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat main body 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall protruding from the rear side of the main body 556a to the left in a front view in a short flat shape. A portion 556b, a notch 556c formed in a rectangular shape from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b to the right in a front view and formed at predetermined intervals in a vertical direction, and a right side in a front view right side of the main body portion 556a. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e that projects rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a plurality of vertically arranged input lens portions 556e, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left side, a plurality of side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction such that each input lens unit 556e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. And the outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main unit 553a. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward in front view from the rear end side toward the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating forward and backward. Is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The accommodation recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right decorative member 557 in the right unit can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped and a rectangular parallelepiped portion extending upward and downward, and to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 556e are located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 556e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 556a.

  The side reflection part 556f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is formed on the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the plane of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 556f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 556e as a center, a mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is configured such that the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main unit 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens unit 556e is concavely curved forward, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, and each input lens unit 556e in the main body 556a. At the center and diffuse radially forward.

  The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits a flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left side of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right side of the main body 556a, and is reflected by the inner side of the right side to the side reflection section 556f. Becomes

  The light that has entered the main body 556a forward from the input lens portion 556e is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by striking the saw-shaped side reflector 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a has a white color. As a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f in the main body 556a and the light radiated to the left from the side reflector 556f to the right on the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 556a is radiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction at the dividing line to form a concentric arc groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the right surface of the main body portion 556a outward (to the right) is prevented from becoming light having a concentric striped light and shade. Thus, light with more uniform density can be radiated to the right. Thus, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodating recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed) of the main body 556a in front view. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric grooves of the portion 556f and lines extending radially can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection part 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be seen. Can be decorated with the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of the effect is transparent. Is applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right decoration member 557 and the right cover 558 of the right unit are formed substantially symmetrically with the left decoration member 554 and the right cover 555 of the right unit. The decorations applied to the right decorative member 554 and the right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides opened. The right unit left light-blocking member 559 includes a flat main body 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body 559a to the right in front view in a flat-plate shape, and a rear wall 559b. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a rectangular shape to the left from the right end side in the front view and formed in a plurality at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The wall portion 559b extends rightward from the right surface of the main body portion 559a and extends rearward. A plurality of plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward as it goes forward. It is formed so as to be inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main units 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right side from the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 559b is in contact with the left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560.

  The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d which are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are vertically separated from each other. The reinforcing portions 559d of each set are formed at positions behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

  The right unit right light blocking member 560 has a shape in side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right opening that is opened to the right of the right unit left light blocking member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state where the right unit right light blocking member 560 is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. Accordingly, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left and right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction with a predetermined width in the left and right direction. . Light radiated forward from the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is converted into the right unit decoration. The light is emitted to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 correspond to the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Further, since the inner space of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d, they are arranged behind the respective divided spaces. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 prevents light from interfering between the spaces, and a portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space is removed. , Can be independently illuminated. In other words, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide the area into a plurality of (four) areas and to independently decorate each of them.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-sided decorative portion 561b has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-face decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top, the multi-face decoration parts 561b are arranged one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 projects slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a light-impermeable member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes larger than the door frame left side unit 530 in a plate shape, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. I have. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at a front end. To make a luminous decoration.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility of a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is connected to the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. An effect such as a partition can be exerted between them. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 that the player is playing in a private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around. Can be.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island facilities may be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Accordingly, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the right and left sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated and decorated, even if they are not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the The pachinko machine 1 can be notified of the presence of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

  Further, when a problem such as clogging of a ball or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 in the door frame right side unit 550, a right unit left decorative member 554, a right unit right decorative member 557, and a right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By causing the members 561 and the like to emit light in a unique manner, the staff of the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the malfunction and can be recognized, and the malfunction can be promptly dealt with. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the player being frustrated.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87C is a view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 90 is a sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the central base 571, which is mounted at the center in the left-right direction above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend right and left, and the center in the left and right direction projects forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 having a box-like shape with open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. A plurality of (three on each side) slits extending each and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and vertically separated A unit body 271 having 574b and attached to the front sides of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and a unit body 271 arranged at the front side of a pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close a pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of perforated metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front surface of the unit body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has a translucent top decoration member 576, and is mounted on the rear side of the top decoration member 576. A door frame top decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b which are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 and have a plurality of slits 574b closed, and both right and left ends of the top middle decoration member 576 A plurality of (three left and right) transparent plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 271 over the opening 574a, respectively, and the top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. Top left decorative lens members 579 and 579 respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the front left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side, and the opening portions 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion of each of them.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is mounted inside each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on portions of the plural (three) light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. Door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574 b respectively formed on the left and right sides of the center of the unit body 271 on the rear side in the left and right direction. A pair of substrate bases 585 respectively attached to the parts, and a door which is attached to the front surface of the pair of substrate bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a square shape in front view extending left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is assembled diagonally to the door frame top unit 570, and each of the front surfaces is obliquely mounted such that the side near the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 is a full-range cone-type speaker that can output sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front in such a manner that lower portions near the left and right ends of a square extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed such that the shape of the unit main body 271 when viewed from the front is formed by cutting out a square extending left and right with a trapezoid narrowing upward from the lower side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape in plan view, and a half of a full width (length in the left-right direction) centered on the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the square and defined as a base. The shape is a combination of a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a square that protrudes short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid being a long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, the left and right sides of the part protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end of the front end of the front protruding part. It is located behind (recessed).

  In the unit main body 271, openings 574 a that penetrate back and forth are formed at positions on the front surface of the unit from the left and right ends to the position outside the portion protruding forward. The unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending obliquely at a predetermined height in the up-down direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at an obliquely extending portion of the front surface that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape. 574b are formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend right and left from near the front end of a part of the front surface of the unit body 271 that extends obliquely forward to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 so as to be three vertically separated from each other.

  The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c which is notched squarely from the rear end toward the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end to the left and right in the lower surface. , Is provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The in-top decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a pentagonal shape in which the shape in a front view is bent such that the center in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape that combines a right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the set side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The in-top decoration member 576 is inclined such that the pentagonal portion on the front surface moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is entirely formed in a three-dimensional shape, and has translucency.

  The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is inclined behind the top middle decorative member 576 in such a manner that its front surface moves along the front surface of the pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 and moves rearward downward. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the inside decoration substrate 577 of the door frame, and the top decoration member 576 can be illuminated by emitting light from the LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front protruding portion on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The light guide member 578 will be described as a straight part extending right and left from the end to the center from the end toward the center. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the center end portion of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the vertical direction at the circular arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed such that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. I have.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like unevenness, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the circular arc portion 578b and having a plurality of unevennesses. It has.

  In a state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583 a and 584 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While traveling inward toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of the top front decorative lens member 580 in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated.

  Also, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Accordingly, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the circular arc portion 578b can be illuminated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 is provided by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a favorable (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the center in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently house the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit main body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a for independently accommodating the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front face of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a quadrangular truncated pyramid protruding forward are arranged in right and left rows.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579, between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill a space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top center left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill a space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state where the top middle right decorative member 582 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is mounted inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. In the door frame top left decorative board 583, LEDs 583a are mounted at positions facing the left end faces of three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be luminous decoration.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. By the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be luminous decoration.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 where a plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a substantially square side wall having sides extending vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall having a square shape in front view extending rightward and leftward outward from a rear side of the side wall, and a front end of an upper side of the side wall. An upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper part of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and an outline that connects the lower side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular prism-shaped box shape having an open space between upper and lower hypotenuses. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 such that an open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. To this board base 585, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached so that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Can be The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the left and right so that it moves forward toward the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 271. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b are formed on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Accordingly, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit light at a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Can be The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585, so that the front surface moves to the front side toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 so as to move to the front side. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled with the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 are formed. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Accordingly, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light at a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light blocking members 588 is attached to the rear of the front surface of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light blocking members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a light-impermeable member. The light blocking member 588 is provided between the upper and lower LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 which are arranged in line with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. With this light blocking member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member are provided. It is possible to satisfactorily emit and decorate the decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 independently of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 gouge backward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the top middle decoration member 576 projects greatly forward, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed in the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Since the speaker cover 575 is provided between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, the speaker cover 575 faces forward. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good condition, and high quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decoration. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be satisfactorily illuminated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through-hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 before and after the door frame base 110 is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the player (front) as widely as possible through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponding to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 is a rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower part than the upper plate 321) (the front surface of the lower plate front decorative portion 326 c) on both left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to go backwards (the plate unit). The front surface of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concavely curved shape such that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are located rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude significantly forward, so that the effect operation unit 400 is emphasized and emphasized to the player. Thus, the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly noticed.

  The door frame 3 inclines the effect operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. When the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the head (face) of the player, and the player drops his / her gaze to activate the staging operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation buttons 410 can be seen almost in front, so that the large and round operation buttons 410 can be intensely visually recognized, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation buttons 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward and round, when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand is moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the operation button 410 can be “rapidly pressed” relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward and is round, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, as well as left and right. , Or from the front, and the operation using the operation buttons 410 can be more enjoyed by the operation buttons 410 with good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has the effect operation unit 400 attached by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and has a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at a lower portion of the effect operation unit 400. When the vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the hand of the player touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the operation button is surprised. The effect using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The lower plate 322 below the lower palate becomes less noticeable, which makes it easier for a player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that the pachinko machine is clearly different, which appeals to the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 having high power can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326 d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently ensured. Further, since the rear portion of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the rear side of the staging operation unit 400, when the player puts his / her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his / her left hand on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. In comparison, the fact that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger can be recognized by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and a lower plate for pulling out game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly forward and backward, and is disposed on the right outside the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) when viewed from the front. In other words, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the tray unit cover 326 (to the right outside the lower tray opening 326d), and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Side, etc., the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the dish unit 320 (sling machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate hole 322a is provided in the lower plate 322 in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c, so that the lower plate hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the dollar box through the lower plate 322 is also reduced. I can't see it. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that the game balls of the upper plate 321 or the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 830 with the upper plate 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Because it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image), thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. it can.

  In the lower frame 322, the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the raised wall is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are directly transferred to the lower dish ball 322. It can be guided to the hole 322a or indirectly reflected to the right wall to the hole 322a. Thus, in a state in which the lower dish hole 322a remains open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are located on the left side of the lower dish hole 322a in the lower dish 322. The lower plate 322 can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first region A1), so that the game balls flowing through the lower plate 322 are not shown to the player. The game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 in which the lower plate 322 faces forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not obstructed by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 of the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his hand on or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the heavy bass from the speaker 921 output from the lower speaker opening 326e to the front. It is possible to entertain the people and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 can play in the private room. It is possible to give an illusion that the player is playing, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can decorate the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrude largely forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side. The pachinko machine 1 can notify the presence of the pachinko machine 1 even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 or from a distance such as from the side along the island facilities, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes, in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left and right front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576, The shape of the door frame top unit 570 in the top frame decoration unit 570 is smaller than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the left and right front edges of the top middle decoration member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape such that the left and right front surfaces are located rearward. This allows only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to appear to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be emphasized and emphasized to the player. The interior decoration member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers separated from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punched metal at both left and right ends in a door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extend from the left and right sides of the middle top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right sides through the front of the speaker cover 575, and The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated. As a result, the upper part of the front of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 is not conspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, so that the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the player is in the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player, and to make the player enjoy high quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  Thus, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, on the lower side and the upper side from the through-hole 111, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed. , Each of which protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, so that the player can see the decoration with a sense of unity above and below the imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and with sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  The door frame 3 has the top decoration member 576 and the rendering operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction and the effect operation unit 400 projecting forward. When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can see a light-emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. As illustrated, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to an island facility of a game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame base 600 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, respectively, and the reinforcing frame 660 mounted to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in a front view are provided. .

  The body frame 4 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the body frame base 600 and is used to launch a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; And a locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the cage player side, a board unit 900 attached to a lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board. A game board placement section 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion port 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a left and right side of the lower end of the game board 5 that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement section 602. And a game board regulating unit 603 for regulating backward movement.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view for mounting the ball firing device 680, and a right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 605 that penetrates back and forth and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a front and rear lower left side from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front, and the door of the board unit 900 A connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward, and a circular opening that penetrates back and forth at the lower left side of the game board placement section 602 when viewed from the front to allow the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward. And a speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in a front view, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided for attachment. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends of the rear surface at the left end in front view, and is an upper hinge mounting for mounting the main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attachment portion 610 are provided.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably mounted at an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and at a position slightly below the left side of the game board mounting part 602 in the left-right center in front view. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 601.

[4-2. Upper hinge member on body frame side and lower hinge member on body frame side]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600.

  The main frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L-shape, and a columnar protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The upper hinge member 622 pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side in the front view of the upper hinge pin 622 to pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. Hinge hole 623 for a door frame for use. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 has a portion of the upper hinge body 621 bent downward, and is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600.

  The main frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L-shape. A lower hinge hole (not shown) for the outer frame that is pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and a horizontally extending flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641. Hinge second main body 643 in which the rear part of the plate-like plate material is bent upward in an L-shape, and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 that penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame, and extending upward from the left end behind the door frame hinge hole 644 in a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643, and the door frame 3 A regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second main body 643 has a horizontally-extended portion with a predetermined interval above the horizontally-extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641, and a portion bent upward has a lower hinge first portion. The body 641 is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward. In the main frame side lower hinge member 640, a portion bent upward of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcement frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross section in a plan view with its right side opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. A pair of left positioning members 661 are mounted vertically separated from each other.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and also enters the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Illegal insertion of a tool can be prevented.

[4-4. Ball launching device]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93, and 94. The ball firing device 680 is a device for driving game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball firing device 680, the hitting strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is mounted on a flat launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 681 on the right side in front view. A launch solenoid 682, which is a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a hitting hammer 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and a diagonally upward left extension near the tip of the hitting hammer 683. And a launch rail 684 on which a game ball can be rolled.

  In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 684, and the game balls are supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 684. When the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting hammer 683. The game ball hit by the ball hammer 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 684, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  If the hitting ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, the distance between the firing rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). , Falls into the foul ball receiving port 275 of the foul cover unit 270 below, and is discharged to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the body frame base 600 of the body frame 4 and can lock between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 attached to the right side of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 protruding forward from the unit base 701 and locking with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of being locked to the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701 in a cylindrical shape, A protrusion protrudes from the front end in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3. A key cylinder 710 for unlocking either the hook 702 for the frame or the hook 703 for the outer frame.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the movable ball removing piece in the payout device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the movable ball removing piece. It is.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as exploded from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as exploded from the rear. Further, FIG. 111 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIG. 95 and FIG. 96, the payout unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the reverse L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending left and right and opened upward and attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in front view. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two front and rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) that is swingably suspended from above.

  The payout unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner. A payout device 830 which is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 accommodated in a payout control board box 950. And The game balls circulate in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the payout devices 830 pay out the game balls one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and plays the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Guide path 861 that guides the game balls forward to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge port 850 e forward to the front frame of the door frame 3 from the front end. The full guide path 862 that guides to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are connected to the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side opened, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side opened, and a front case 822. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and that separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822 from each other. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 mounted thereon, and a pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear movable piece member rotatably mounted by the shaft member 824 and disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826, and a ball-out detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational position of the pair of movable member front 825 and movable member rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding entrance 821a which is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guiding exit which is open at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 821b, and a guiding path 821c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821a and the ball guiding outlet 821b and through which game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c extends from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end thereof at an obliquely lower angle with respect to the horizontal at a small angle, and at the center of the height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introducer 821d. The detection unit 821e includes a detection unit 821e that extends straight down to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f that extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821e to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 has a cutout portion 821g on the right wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding entrance 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guidance exit that opens at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 822b, and a guiding path 822c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a and the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guiding entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end so as to be lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and the center of the height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introducing portion 822d. The detection unit 822e includes a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends from the detection unit 822e in the width of the left and right sides of the rear case 822 in a meandering manner. In addition, the rear case 822 includes a cutout portion 822g on the right wall of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. When the rear case 822 is assembled to the ball guidance unit 820, the rear case 822 is formed so that the guidance passage 821c and the guidance passage 822c coincide with each other. I have.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 825a. An extension 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a. The extension 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward; A detection piece 825f which extends outward from the right end and which can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position close to the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the cutout portion 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a projects into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (leftward in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in a direction (to the right in a front view) in which the lower end of the movable piece 825a approaches the wall of the guide path 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f at the front of the movable piece member 825 is in a state of not detecting with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 does not detect.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable plate-like movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 826a. An extension 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward, and A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end and that can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the cutout portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a projects into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is prevented from further rotating in the direction that projects into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in a direction (to the right in front view) so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f behind the movable piece member 826 is in a state of not detecting with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls being arranged in a row in front and rear by a tank rail 803, and a plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. 822 allows the user to be guided back and forth in two rows to the lower payout device 830 (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can flow well. Can be.

  Also, when the game balls flow through the guide paths 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a at the front 825 of the movable piece member and at the rear 826 of the movable piece member, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The front of the movable piece 825 and the rear of the movable piece 826 rotate in the direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f at the front of the movable piece member 825 and at the rear of the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that a game ball is present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game balls flow in the guidance passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d increases, and the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d are movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It rebounds to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game ball, the vibration causes the movable pieces 825a and 826a to be caught or penetrated between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c. Scratched dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by using separate movable piece members 825 and 826, respectively. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 is detected by one ball cutout detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide paths 821c and 822c, the movable piece member front. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece 825 or the rear of the movable piece 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball out detection sensor 827. You. Therefore, since the running out of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by screwing metal screws as weights into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the front movable member 825 and the rear movable member 826, the weight of the front movable member 825, the movable member rear 826, and the weight of the weight. Accordingly, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction in which they project into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. By doing so, it is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment includes the movable pieces 825a and 826a at the front of the movable piece member 825 and the rear of the movable piece member 826 whose lower ends protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow by their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the weight of the movable piece can be determined by the weight of the weight of the weight before the movable piece member 825 and after the movable piece member 826. The lower ends of 825a and 826a can be easily turned (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Thus, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as a weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e formed as through holes and mounted, even if the front of the movable piece member 825 and the rear of the movable piece member 826 frequently rotate, the weight is not changed. The front 825 and the rear 826 of the movable member can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the front 825 of the movable member and the rear 826 of the movable member (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e). . Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, thereby simplifying the trouble of attaching the weight. Thus, the cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guide passages 821c and 822c have introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding game balls toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a, respectively, on the upstream side of the portions where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude inside. Since the game balls flow through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls contact the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, by vibrating the movable pieces 825a and 826a, it is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like that have been caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front part 825 and the rear part 826 of the movable part can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be favorably rotated, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to erroneous detection or the like. Even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide balls 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that promptness can be obtained. Can be replenished with game balls, and by reducing the time during which the game is interrupted as short as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, and has a payout opening 831a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. Payout exit 831b, a ball extraction outlet 831c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass through, and a payout passage 831d that connects the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b and through which game balls can flow. And a front box 831 that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with a ball extraction outlet 831c and has a ball extraction passage 831e through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A payout opening 832a, which has a box shape with an open front side and is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass therethrough, and game balls near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. The dispensing outlet 832b is opened to be able to pass through, the ball extracting outlet 832c is opened near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that the game ball can pass, and the dispensing inlet 832a communicates with the dispensing outlet 832b so that the game ball is distributed. It includes a possible payout passage 832d and a rear box 832 that has a ball free passage 832e that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicates with the ball emptying outlet 832c, and through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and is attached to the inside of the front box 831 so that the rotating shaft passes through the front box 831. Motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, a drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834, meshing with the drive gear 835, and rotatable by the front box 831 and the front cover 833. , A driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably penetrating therethrough and having a front end attached to the front cover 833 and a rear A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 penetrates the shaft member 838 so as to be rotatable, and is provided with the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A dispensing blade 839 that is disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 839. And

  Furthermore, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and has a flat partition plate 841 for separating the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, payout passages 831d and 832d, and a ball emptying passage. 831e and 832e are diverged from each other and are rotatably mounted by a front box 831 and a rear box 832, and can be used to close the ball passages 831e and 832e. A ball release lever 844 slidably mounted vertically slidably on the upper right side of the box 832 to make the ball release movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout entrance 831a to the ball ejection outlet 831c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. Bends to extend vertically to the left, near the center of the total height, to the left to extend substantially horizontally, and then extends vertically downward about 1/3 from the left end to the left and right width of the front box 831 again Thus, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 831e is a form in which a portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 831a in the payout passage 831d is further extended. It diverges to the height near the center.

  In addition, the front box 831 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout exit 831b in the payout passage 831d, and protruding rearward as it goes downward, and is formed at an upper portion on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball ejection outlet 832c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. After being bent so as to extend vertically to the left and approximately horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. Thus, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 832d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 832e is a form in which the portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 832a in the payout passage 832d is further extended from the height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the total height of the rear box 832. It diverges to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout exit 832b in the payout passage 832d, and is formed at an upper portion of a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward, and on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball pullout lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The pay-out passages 831d and 832d and the ball emptying passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blades 839 are arranged. Further, between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached. In other words, the game balls flowing through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls flowing through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are separated from the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought near the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angle of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction from a spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detecting pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c projecting rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and having irregularities formed on a peripheral surface at a rear end thereof and connectable to the dispensing blade 839 are provided. .

  The dispensing blade 839 extends cylindrically forward and backward, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in a circumferential direction from a front end of the base cylinder 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted. A plurality (three) of front blades 839b and a plurality of front blades 839b projecting from the rear end of the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be alternated. 3) A rear blade 839c and a connected portion that projects cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a and that has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the dispensing blade 839 are provided three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is rotated relative to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It extends outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Also, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the outer periphery of the base cylinder portion 839a about the axis thereof is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In addition, a diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder 839a up to the part closest to the axis of the base cylinder 839a in the arc portion (sphere accommodation portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is four times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold approximately 3/10 (between 1/4 to 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball by the arc portion (ball accommodation portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be promptly accommodated between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c) (the ball accommodating portion 839e).

  In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, with the dispensing device 830 assembled, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out respectively. In addition, the discharge blade 839 is disposed at a position below the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the discharge passages 831d and 832d, and is bent in a crank shape. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located immediately below a portion that extends vertically downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, in the portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is set to 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  Accordingly, when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 abuts on the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped portion of the payout passages 831d and 832d. , And is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d, 832d, and can pass through the payout outlets 831b, 832b. Released downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to be about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since a depth of / 7 to ４ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game balls can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the related art, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape up and down and back and forth, and has a body portion 843a whose lower portion is bent to form a letter shape when viewed from the front, and a tubular shape that extends back and forth at the upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a that is bent, and a main body portion 843a. And a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 105) formed of a through hole penetrating back and forth at a lower portion bent in a V-shape.

  When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower part of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, and the shaft cylinder portion 843b at the upper end dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a position extending obliquely to the lower right in front view from the payout entrances 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side in front view slightly higher than the portion bent downward. Mounted on

  The dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment has a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward in a normal state, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right in front view. In contact. This restricts rotation of the ball-moving movable piece 843 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (see FIG. 105A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-moving movable piece 843 that is bent in a rectangular shape, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is obliquely lower left in front view. Extending to The lower end of the main body 843a is located near a portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball-out passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball removing movable pieces 843 (the main body portion 843a) close the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a partial wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. are doing.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball-moving movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Although a force for rotating the anti-clockwise rotation in a front view is exerted by this, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction is regulated by the ball release lever 844, so that the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protrusion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise in front view. Restrictions on movement are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Note that the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower part of the main body 843a contacts the left surfaces of the members forming the right sides of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). As a result, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e to be discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, a weight made of a metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to mount the ball-moving lever 844 upward. Then, when the regulation of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball-moving movable piece 843 projects into the ball-drawing passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-moving movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  In a normal state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball-pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game balls entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a are transferred to the main body 843a of the ball-pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made with the game ball, the ball-moving movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact. Therefore, dust, dust, and the like that are caught or intruded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-moving movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate due to biting, dust, or the like.

  In addition, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d formed as a through-hole, the weight can be moved even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The weight-moving piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843 only by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. Can be reduced.

  If the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843, or the rotating shaft rusts, and the ball removing movable piece 843 rusts. The movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game balls entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the movable ball removing piece 843, the ball removing passage 831e is formed by the movable ball removing piece 843. , 832e are closed, and when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 843. The ball removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removing lever 844 is operated to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, the ball removing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball can be reliably removed. In addition, workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with an open rear side, and is mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and has a front open side. It has a box-shaped upper full cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving opening 850a that is open upward to allow a game ball to pass therethrough at a position on the left side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface. Is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls flow, a normal discharge port 850d opening downward at a lower portion of the upper ball storage passage 850c immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a, and an upper ball storage passage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a position other than the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d, and a full tank discharge port 850e. And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  In addition, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball emptying path 850g that guides game balls entering from the upper ball emptying entrance 850b downward, and an upper part that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball emptying path 850g. And a ball ejection outlet 850h. In the upper full tank path unit 850, a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball ejection outlet 850h are sequentially opened from the left side in a front view and downward. The upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 on the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  When the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball emptying inlet 850b is provided. Are located immediately below the ball ejection outlets 831c and 832c of the payout device 830. In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are connected to the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860. 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball-free guide path 865, each open directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper discharge ball reception opening 850a is opened directly below the upper discharge ball reception 850a. From the normal discharge port 850d.

  When the inside of the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. When the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition piece 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition piece 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860.

  In this way, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically transfers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached below the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 by the normal guide path 861. And a full tank guide path 862 for guiding the game balls released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guiding the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 by changing the guideway open / close door 863 to And a closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball emptying outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. And a lower ball-free guideway 865 for discharging air to the sphere.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball empty guideway 865 are arranged in order from the left to the right in front view. The normal guideway 861, the full tank guideway 862, and the lower ball empty guideway 865 have their rear ends opened upward. The normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right, and extend forward to near the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower. Further, the full tank taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball empty guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts, as shown in the figure.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotated clockwise in front view by a closing spring 864. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860, a full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is arranged at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disc-shaped base 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely to the upper left from the base 863a and that can close the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862, and an extension portion 863d extending in a plate shape diagonally to the lower left from the base portion 863a. And an operating projection 863e that projects forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extension 863d and that can abut on the door opening / closing abutting portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 does not require the openings to be closed, but means that the game balls cannot pass through. The operating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that the front end face projects forward as approaching the end side in the counterclockwise direction. are doing.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864 so that the second door plate portion 863c is located at the front end of the lower case 867 from below the front end opening of the full guideway 862. By contacting the boss 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has a front end formed with a through ball passage 273, a full tank receptacle 274, and a door opening / closing port in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guideway opening / closing door 863 does not abut on the operation protrusion 863 e. As a result, it is rotated clockwise in a front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (A)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway The game ball does not spill from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863, and the door frame 3 is activated. Due to the inclination of the front end face of the projection 863e, a force acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 Then, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 111 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the second door plate 863c is located above the front end opening of the full guideway 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4 and the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank are full. In front of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, the penetrating sphere passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different from each other in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are rotated by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the doors are opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be reduced in size. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be more effectively utilized.

  The payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321, and more payout devices 830 from the payout device 830. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When it remains above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, Payout of game balls to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270 is automatically switched. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 in addition to the upper plate 321 becomes full of the game balls and cannot supply the game balls to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of. When the movable piece 278 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 when the game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are filled with the game balls. And the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  The stopping of the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is performed by, for example, storing the game balls until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In this state, the number that can fill the storage path 277 on the upstream side, the full guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850 can be filled. When the game balls are paid out, the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore, in a game state in which many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game state, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are dispensed by paying out game balls. Can reduce the need to worry about becoming full of game balls, and can concentrate on the big hit game state and entertain the player.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. A speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front, and in which a power supply board is accommodated; An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a dispensing control board box 950. .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510, and the door main body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119 and the like. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board 5. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating a passage through which game balls are distributed by the distribution member 2011. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating the flow of game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011. FIGS. 117 and 118 are distributed to the second passage 2014 side by the distribution member 2011. It is a figure explaining a flow of a game ball. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 having a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and defining the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be divided, a substrate holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. It further comprises a peripheral control unit attached to the rear side of 1100, and a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. ing. A game board-side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 5, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the game board effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than an inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder attached to the rear side and the back unit attached to the rear surface. The back unit is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a square opening in the rear wall. The display device 1600 is provided with a lock mechanism for detachably attaching the display device 1600 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 114, a game board side effect display device 1600 having a liquid crystal display type display area is disposed substantially at the center of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1. In the game board effect display device 1600, a fluctuating game in which a plurality of kinds of decorative symbols included in a plurality of symbol rows (three in this embodiment) are displayed in a fluctuating manner is performed, and the fluctuating game is executed in connection with the fluctuating game. Various display effects are displayed as images.

  As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 provided at the lower left of the game board 5 includes a first special symbol display 1403 including eight LEDs, a second special symbol display 1405 including eight LEDs, and the like. Have been. On the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, a symbol change for changing and displaying the special symbol is performed. The special symbol is a symbol for notification indicating the result of the determination of the big hit or the small hit (big hit determination). In the present embodiment, the fluctuating game using the decorative symbol is stopped after the symbol fluctuating in which the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is started. Is executed as one game. Hereinafter, the symbol variation performed on the first special symbol display 1403 may be referred to as “first side symbol variation”, and the symbol variation performed on the second special symbol display 1405 is referred to as “second side symbol variation”. Sometimes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a symbol change is started, a jackpot determination is performed using any of the special symbols from among a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). Is to be selected. Then, when the big hit determination using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, the control for starting the symbol change on the symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side based on the result of the big hit determination is performed. (Main control board 1310). In the symbol fluctuation started in this way, after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the big hit determination, a big hit symbol (big hit display result) which is a special symbol stop mode capable of recognizing the big hit, and One of a small hit symbol (small hit display result), which is a special symbol stop mode in which a hit can be recognized, and a special symbol (slip display result), a special symbol stop mode in which a loss can be recognized, appears. By being stopped, the player can recognize whether a big hit, a small hit, or a loss has occurred. When the big hit symbol is stopped in the appearance, a big hit game in which a prize ball can be obtained by the player is given. In the case where the game is stopped in a manner in which the small hit symbol appears, a small hit game in which a prize ball can be acquired by the player is provided.

  On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured with a display area larger than each of the symbol indicators 1403 and 1405, and in the display area, a plurality of symbol columns (three columns in the present embodiment) are respectively provided. A plurality of types of decorative symbols (a plurality of types of numbers) included are displayed larger than the special symbol.

  Then, a display result corresponding to the display result of each of the symbol displays 1403 and 1405 is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. More specifically, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, a special symbol combination (all rows) is also displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. When the symbol combination in which the symbols are the same symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405, the game board side effect display device In 1600 as well, a special symbol combination different from that at the time of the big hit (a symbol combination in which the symbols in all rows are the same symbol) is fixedly stopped and displayed, and is shifted to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the symbol combination at the time of the loss (the symbols in all the rows are not the same symbol) also in the game board side effect display device 1600. Such as pattern combination) is determined stopped and displayed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize whether the big hit has been won, the small hit has been won, or has been lost (losing) by confirming the variable game played on the game board side effect display device 1600. Will be able to

  In addition, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped in the order of the left row → the right row → the middle row when viewed from the player side, and the specific two rows (in this embodiment, When the same decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of preceding two rows (left and right columns), a reach state is formed. In the present embodiment, the left row of the plurality of symbol rows is the first stop row, the right row is the second stop row, the middle row is the third stop row, and the left row and the right row are the reach forming rows forming the reach state. Becomes

  Here, the “temporarily stopped display” is one that can appear during a period in which the special symbol is maintained in the fluctuating state on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405, and This is a state in which a specific decorative pattern is displayed in a fluctuation state in the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, the “fixed stop display” is one that can appear when the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 or thereafter, and In the display area of the effect display device 1600, any decorative design is stationary without any fluctuation.

  As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 further includes a first LED including two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of game balls to the first left starting port 2002a and the first right starting port 2002b. A special reserve number display 1404, a second special reserve number display 1406 including two LEDs for displaying the reserve number related to the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the passing of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 A normal symbol display 1402 composed of four LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary determination to be determined, and a normal reservation display 1408 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are provided. ing.

  Here, the first special reserved number display 1404 informs the player of the number of stored big hit determinations on the first special symbol side (hereinafter, also referred to as the first reserved stored number) which have been reserved in an unexecuted state. Is what you do. The first reserved memory number is increased by "1" when a game ball wins in the first left starting port 2002a or the first right starting port 2002b arranged in the game board 5, while the first side symbol fluctuation is not changed. By being started, “1” is subtracted. Therefore, when a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 during the period in which the first side symbol change is being performed, the first reserved storage number is further added, and the predetermined upper limit number (the first upper limit number, In the present embodiment, it is accumulated up to “4”).

  In addition, the second special reserved number display 1406 notifies the player of the number of stored big hit determinations on the second special symbol side (hereinafter, also referred to as a second reserved stored number) which are suspended in an unexecuted state. Things. The second reserved storage number is increased by “1” when a game ball wins at the second starting port 2004 arranged on the game board 5, and is increased by “1” when the second side symbol change is started. Is subtracted. Therefore, when a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 during the period in which the second-side symbol change is being performed, the second reserved storage number is further added, and the predetermined upper limit number (the second upper limit number, In the present embodiment, it is accumulated up to “4”).

  Further, in the ordinary symbol display 1402, when it is determined whether or not an ordinary hit has occurred (ordinary determination), an ordinary symbol change is performed in which a plurality of types of ordinary symbols are changed based on the result of the ordinary determination. This normal symbol change is a normal hit symbol (normal hit display result), which is a stop mode of a normal symbol that can recognize a normal hit after maintaining a change state for a change time selected based on the result of the normal determination, The player is stopped in a form in which one of a normal symbol (a loss display result), which is a mode of stopping a normal symbol that can recognize a normal loss, allows the player to win or lose (normal loss). You will be able to recognize if you have done it. Note that, when the game is stopped in a manner in which a normal hit symbol appears, a normal electric winning port 2011 described later is opened.

  Further, the ordinary hold display 1408 notifies the player of the number of ordinary judgments that have been suspended in an unexecuted state (hereinafter, also referred to as ordinary figure reserved storage number). The number of stored ordinary figures is incremented by "1" when a game ball is received by the gate unit 2003 provided on the game board 5, and decremented by "1" when a normal symbol change is started. Therefore, when a game ball is accepted by the gate unit 2003 during the period in which the normal symbol change is performed, the number of stored general-purpose drawings is further increased, and the predetermined upper limit number (the upper-limit number of the general figure, in this embodiment, "4").

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first-side symbol variation and the second-side symbol variation are configured not to be executed at the same time, and the symbol variation using the special symbol (the first-side symbol variation or the second-side symbol variation). Is completed, when both the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are equal to or more than "1", the second-side symbol variation based on the second reserved storage number is preferentially executed. Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol change (first-side symbol change or second-side symbol change) using a special symbol and a normal symbol change can be executed simultaneously.

[5-1. Game board composition]
Hereinafter, the board configuration of the game board will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.
As shown in FIG. 114, a frame-shaped center role 2500 is provided at a substantially central portion of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Further, in the area below the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, a first left starting port 2002a in which a game ball driven into the left side of the center role 2500 can be received, and a lowermost end of the game area 5a. And an out port 1003 for collecting game balls flowing down to and discharging the game balls from the game area 5a.

  Here, the first left starting port 2002a is open at the upper side, and is capable of always receiving a game ball driven into the left side of the center role item 2500. The first left starting port 2002a is disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, just below the center of the stage 2530 in the center role 2500, and a game ball discharged from the center of the stage 2530. Can be accepted with a high probability. In addition, the first left starting port 2002a is provided with a first left starting port sensor 4002a for detecting an accepted game ball.

  In addition, in an area on the right side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, a distribution member 2011 for alternately distributing a game ball hit on the right side of the center role 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, The first right starting port 2002b and the second starting port 2004, into which a game ball driven into the right side of the center role 2500 can be accepted, and a game ball driven into the right side of the center role 2500 can pass through. And a gate portion 2003. In the lower right area of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, the general winning opening 2001, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second winning prize opening 2005 through which a game ball driven into the right side of the center role 2500 can pass. Two major winning openings 2005b are provided.

  Although details will be described later, the distribution member 2011 is a member for alternately distributing a game ball driven into the right side of the center role 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and has a first right starting port. In 2002b, the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 can be received. Similarly, the gate portion 2003 is configured to allow game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2022 to pass therethrough. On the other hand, the second starting port 2004 is capable of receiving game balls distributed to the second passage 2014 side by the distribution member 2011. In addition, the general winning opening 2001, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2005b can receive game balls distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It has been.

  Also, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) at a predetermined portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 provided in the area on the right side of the object 2500, that is, the gate section 2003, the first right starting port 2002b, the second starting port 2004, and the area around the second big winning opening 200505005b are obstacles. No nails are planted.

[5-1-1. About distribution member]
Next, the distribution member 2011 for alternately distributing the game balls hit on the right side of the center role 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 115, the distribution member 2011 has two concave portions each capable of holding a game ball, and a position where the game ball is to be distributed to the first passage 2012 (FIG. 115 (A)). ) And a position (a position shown in FIG. 115 (C)) where game balls are to be distributed to the second passage 2014.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), when the left concave portion of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward, the game ball driven into the right side of the center role 2500 fits into the concave portion. Get stuck. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), the game ball fitted into the left concave portion of the distribution member 2011 causes the distribution member 2011 to rotate leftward due to the weight of the game ball, and causes the first passage 2012 to rotate. Will be released to the side. At this time, the right concave portion of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), when the right concave portion of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward, the game ball driven into the right side of the center role object 2500 fits into the concave portion. Put in. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the game ball fitted into the right concave portion of the distribution member 2011 rotates the distribution member 2011 rightward due to the own weight of the game ball, and the second passage entrance 2013 (the second passage 2014). At this time, the concave portion on the left side of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward.

  In this way, after the game ball hit to the right side of the center role 2500 is distributed to the first passage 2012 side, the next game ball is distributed to the second passage 2014 side, After the game ball hit on the left side of 2500 is distributed to the second passage 2014 side, the next game ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 side. That is, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the center role 2500, the game ball is always alternately distributed to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and one of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 A plurality of game balls are not continuously distributed to the side.

[5-1-2. About the flow of the game ball in the first passage and the second passage]
Next, the flow of the game balls distributed by the distribution member 2011 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating the flow of game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011. FIGS. 117 and 118 are distributed to the second passage 2014 side by the distribution member 2011. It is a figure explaining a flow of a game ball.

  First, a game ball hit on the right side of the center role item 2500 passes through the right area entry sensor 4006 before reaching the distribution member 2011. As described above, by providing the right area entry sensor 4006 as a sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the right area of the center role item 2500, the first right start port 2002b, the gate section 2003, and the second start A game ball is driven into the right side of the center role item 2500 at a preferable time (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a time saving state) at which the mouth 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2005b should be aimed. Can be grasped.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the game ball distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 passes through the funnel 2017 formed in a funnel shape. As described above, the clune 2017 is provided before the game ball reaches the constantly driven door 2021, so that the game ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011, and then the constantly driven door 2021 is provided. Although the distance to reach is constant, the time to reach the constant drive door 2021 is different each time. That is, the timing at which the drive door 2021 is always in the retreat state is not aimed at, and the timing at which the ball can enter the first right starting port 2002b can be prevented from being aimed at.

  Next, the game ball that has passed the clune 2017 flows constantly above the drive door 2021, but enters the first right start port 2002b when the drive door 2021 is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the constantly driven door 2021 is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the side of the first right starting port 2002b (there is no possibility that the ball enters the first right starting port 2002b). It flows down by bypassing the right side of the first right starting port 2002b. That is, when the game ball flows down above the constantly driven door 2021, attention is paid to whether or not the constantly driven door 2021 is in a retracted state, that is, whether or not it is possible to enter the first right starting port 2002b. be able to.

  A game ball that has entered the first right starting port 2002b from the constantly driven door 2021 has a high probability of first right starting because the first right started port 2002b is disposed immediately below the constantly driven door 2021. Accepted in mouth 2002b. On the other hand, the game ball that has not been accepted by the first right starting port 2002b flows down either the left or right of the first right starting port 2002b, and when the driving door 2021 is always in the protruding state, the right side of the first right starting port 2002b. The game ball that has flowed around the other will merge again and flow down.

  The first right starting port 2002b described above is disposed on the side of the first passage 2012, and when the driving door 2021 is always in the retracted state among the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011. It is possible to receive game balls that have entered the inside. The first right starting port 2002b is provided with a first right starting port sensor 4002b for detecting a game ball received.

  The constantly driven door 2021 changes between a protruding state in which the constantly driving solenoid 2107 protrudes forward and a retracted state in which it is retracted rearward. The evacuation state of 04 seconds is always repeated. In this way, by setting the time during which the constantly driven door 2021 is in the retracted state extremely shorter than the time in which the constantly driven door 2021 is in the protruding state, the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 can be obtained. About 2/100 always enters the inside of the drive door 2021 and is accepted by the first right starting port 2002b. Although the details will be described later, during the big hit gaming state, a large amount of game balls are driven into the right side of the center role 2500 so that the game balls enter the first big winning opening 2005. Even if it is, the ball can be made to enter the first right starting port 2002b during the big hit game state.

  Next, a game ball that has joined without being accepted by the first right starting port 2002b passes through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability because the gate portion 2003 is disposed immediately below the junction portion. As described above, after the unaccepted game balls join the first right starting port 2002b, the game balls head to the gate unit 2003, so that the game balls can pass through the gate unit 2003 efficiently. On the other hand, a game ball that has not passed through the gate portion 2003 flows down one of the left and right sides of the gate portion 2003 and merges again with the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 and flows down.

  Here, the gate portion 2003 is disposed on the side of the first passage 2012, and allows the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution portion seat 2011 to pass therethrough. The gate portion 2003 is disposed downstream of the first right starting port 2002b from the first passage 2012b. The first passage 2012 is formed so that a game ball not accepted by 2002b passes with a high probability. Note that the gate unit 2003 is provided with a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a passing game ball.

  Next, regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, the game ball joined is guided to the upper side of the second starting port 2004, but the passage at that portion is directed to the lower left direction (opposite to the reception port 2016). Direction), it does not enter the reception port 2016 (there is no possibility of entering the second starting port 2004) and flows down the left side of the second starting port 2004. It will be.

  Then, the game ball that has flowed around the left side of the second starting port 2004, that is, the game ball that has flowed down the first passage 2012 but has not entered the first right starting port 2002b, is the second big winning port 2005b. When the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005 is in the retracted state, it is received by the second special winning opening 2005b. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is in the protruding state, the game ball is not received in the second special winning opening 2005b, and the opening and closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is inclined downward and to the left. Along, the game ball is released to the side of the first big winning opening 2005.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117, the game ball distributed to the side of the second passage entrance 2013 (the second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011 enters the second passage entrance 2013 to the back, and enters the first passage. After flowing down the second passage 2014 (hatched portion) provided on the back side of the 2012, it is discharged forward from the second passage outlet 2015. As shown in FIG. 118, the second passage 2014 is provided with a sawtooth-shaped step. By providing such a sawtooth-shaped step, the distribution member 2011 allows the second passage entrance 2013 (the second passage entrance 2013) to be formed. The time from the distribution of the game ball to the side of the second passage 2014) to the arrival at the second starting door 2022 is set to be different each time. That is, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the second starting port door 2022 is in the protruding state from being aimed at, and to prevent the timing at which the ball can enter the second starting port 2004 from being aimed at.

  Next, the game ball discharged forward from the second passage exit 2015 enters the reception entrance 2016 with a high probability because the reception entrance 2016 is disposed immediately below the second passage exit 2015. On the other hand, when the game ball has not entered the reception port 2016, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 2004 side (the ball cannot enter the second starting port 2004), It flows down bypassing the right side of the reception port 2016.

  At this time, the game ball that has entered the reception port 2016 is guided to the second starting port 2004 side and is received by the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port door 2022 is in the protruding state. On the other hand, when the second starting port door 2022 is in the retracted state, the game ball is not guided to the second starting port 2004 side (the ball cannot enter the second starting port 2004). , And flows down in front of the second start-up door 2022 in the retracted state. That is, when a game ball enters from the reception port 2016, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the second starting port door 2022 is in a protruding state, that is, whether or not it is possible to enter the second starting port 2004. it can. Then, such a game ball merges again with the game ball that has flowed around the right side of the reception port 2016 and flows down.

  Here, the second starting port 2004 is disposed on the side of the second passage 2103, enters the game ball distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, that is, enters the second passage entrance 203, and enters the second starting port 2004. Of the game balls released from the passage exit 2015, the game balls enter the reception port 2016, and can receive the game balls guided when the second starting port door 2022 is in the protruding state. Note that the second starting port 2004 is provided with a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a received game ball.

  Further, the second starting port door 2022 changes between a protruding state protruding forward by the second starting port solenoid 2108 and a retracted state retracted backward, and is in the retracted state at normal times. On the other hand, in response to the result of the normal determination drawn by detecting the passing of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003, that is, when the result of the normal determination is “per-drawing”, the state is changed from the evacuation state to the protruding state. It is changing. The second starting port door 2022 is disposed immediately below the second passage outlet 2015 and the receiving port 2016. When the second starting port door 2022 is in a protruding state, the second starting port door 2022 is discharged from the second passage outlet 2015 to receive the receiving port. The game ball that has entered the 2016 can be received, and the game ball can be guided toward the second starting port 2004 located on the left side of the second starting port door 2022. On the other hand, when the second starting port door 2022 is in the retracted state, the game ball released from the second passage exit 2015 and entering the receiving port 2016 does not catch the game ball and passes through the front side of the second starting port door 2022 as it is. And fall down.

  Next, the game ball that has flown down the second passage 2014 but has not entered the second starting port 2004 is released immediately above the second winning port 2005b, and the opening / closing member of the second winning port 2005 is in a retracted state. Is received in the second big winning opening 2005b. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is in the protruding state, the game ball is not received in the second special winning opening 2005b, and the opening and closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is inclined downward and to the left. Along, the game ball is released to the side of the first big winning opening 2005.

  As described above, when a game ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011, the ball can enter the first right starting port 2002b and the game ball enters the gate portion 2003. Is allowed to pass. On the other hand, when a game ball is distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side by the distribution member 2011, it is possible to enter the second start port 2004. Also, the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 and the game balls distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side are in the second big winning opening 2005b. It does not merge right above. For this reason, when the game ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011, it is not possible to enter the ball into the second starting port 2004, and the distribution member 2011 allows the ball to enter the second passage. When a game ball is sorted to the entrance 2013 (the second passage 2014) side, it is not possible to enter the first right starting port 2002b or to pass the game ball to the gate unit 2003.

  Further, the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the game balls hit on the right side of the center role item 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, so that the first ball provided on the first passage 2012 side is provided. A chance to enter the right starting port 2002b and a chance to enter the second starting port 2004 provided on the side of the second passage 2014 alternately occur. Although the details will be described later, the hit determination based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004 is more advantageous for the player than the hit determination based on the ball entering the first right starting port 2002b (second hit determination). In the hit determination based on the ball entering the starting port 2004, "small hit" is performed in most cases.) Therefore, a plurality of game balls can continuously enter the second starting port 2004. When the state occurs, only the hit determination that is advantageous for the player is performed, and the game manager (the hall side) may be disadvantaged. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center role 2500, the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the game ball to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014. Each time a game ball is hit on the right side of 2500, a chance to enter the first right starting port 2002b and a chance to enter the second starting port 2004 are equally given. As a result, only the hit determination that is advantageous to the player is not performed, and the game manager (the hall side) is prevented from being disadvantaged unilaterally.

  When a game ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011, a chance to enter the first right starting port 2002b is obtained, but the drive door 2021 must always be in the retracted state. For example, a game ball does not enter the side of the first right starting port 2002b, and no ball can enter the first right starting port 2002b. On the other hand, when a game ball is distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, a chance to enter the second starting port 2004 is obtained, but the second starting port door 2022 is in a protruding state. Otherwise, the game ball is not guided to the second starting port 2004 side, and it is not possible to enter the second starting port 2004. That is, the game balls are simply distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, and the game balls enter the first right starting port 2002b or the second starting port 2004. This is not a limitation, and attention can be paid with expectation until it can be determined whether or not a game ball enters the first right starting port 2002b or the second starting port 2004.

  In addition, the sorting member 2011 alternately distributes the game balls driven into the right side of the center role item 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, so that the gate portion provided on the first passage 2012 side is provided. A chance that the game ball passes through 2003 and a chance that the ball enters the second starting port 2004 provided on the side of the second passage 2014 occur alternately. Here, the second starting port 2004 makes a normal determination based on a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, and when the result of the normal determination is “per drawing”, the second starting port door 2022 protrudes. By changing to the state, it is possible to enter the ball. In other words, unless the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the ball cannot enter the second starting port 2004. In this regard, even if the game balls are directed to the gate unit 2003 and the second starting port 2004 alternately, if the game balls are directed to only one of the gate unit 2003 and the second starting port 2004, for example, Even if the game ball passes only through the gate portion 2003, the hit determination based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004 cannot be obtained, and even if the game ball heads only on the second starting port 2004, the second The starting port 2004 cannot enter the ball without entering the state where the ball can enter, and the game in the time reduction state cannot be smoothly performed.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center role 2500, the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the game ball to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014. Each time a game ball is driven into the right side of 2500, the roles of the first passage 2012 where the gate portion 2003 is arranged and the second passage 2014 where the second start port 2004 is arranged are made different. ing. That is, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center role item 2500, the game ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011, so that the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, By distributing the game ball to the second passage 2014 side by the dividing member 2011, a chance to enter the second starting port 2004 is obtained, and the game ball driven to the right side of the center role 2500 is set to the second starting position. It is possible to make the ball enter the mouth 2004 efficiently. For this reason, even when a game ball is distributed to either of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, it plays a useful role in advancing the game. Since the game ball does not go to only one of the gate section 2003 and the second starting port 2004, the game in the time reduction state can be smoothly performed.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, a prize ball is paid out to the player, and the number of the prize ball is "1 ball". On the other hand, in order to determine the hit on the second special symbol side based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004, the ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 and passes through the gate portion 2003. At least "two balls" of the game ball to be played and the game ball distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011 and entering the second starting port 2004 are required. In addition, even if the game ball is distributed to the second passage 2014 side by the distribution member 2011, when the game ball does not enter the reception port 2016 or when the second starting port door 2022 is in the retracted state. Does not allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004. As described above, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second starting port 2004 is set to be equal to or less than "2 balls", which is the minimum required for the hit determination on the second special symbol side to be performed. Even if the player continues to hit the game ball on the right side of the center role 2500, the number of game balls held by the player is prevented from increasing.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the game ball driven into the right side of the center role 2500 is distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (the second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011. However, a game ball that has flowed down either of the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (the second passage 2014) will be discharged immediately above the second big winning opening 2005b. The second special winning opening 2005b is provided in the lower right area of the center role item 2500. One big winning opening 2005 is provided.

  Here, the general winning opening 2001 is open at the top, and is distributed to a side of the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2013 by the game ball (the distribution member 2011) which is driven to the right side of the center role 2500. (It may be a game ball.). The general winning opening 2001 is arranged on the lower left side of the second winning opening 2005b, and can receive a game ball released from the side of the second winning opening 2005b. The general winning opening 2001 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting an accepted game ball.

  The first special winning opening 2005 has an opening / closing member, and when the opening / closing member is in the retracted state, a game ball driven into the right side of the center role 2500 (the first passage 2012 and the first passage 2012 by the sorting member 2011). The game ball may be distributed to any side of the two passages 2013.). The first special winning opening 2005 is disposed on the lower left side of the second special winning opening 2005b. The released game balls can be accepted with a high probability. That is, similarly to the second big winning opening 2005b to be described later, the game ball distributed to either of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2013 by the sorting member 2011 can be received, and thus the first big winning opening. When the opening / closing member of the opening 2005 is in the retracted state, it is possible to efficiently enter the first large winning opening 2005 simply by hitting a game ball on the right side of the center role item 2500. Note that the first special winning opening 2005 is provided with a first count sensor 4005a that detects an accepted game ball.

  The opening / closing member of the above-mentioned first special winning opening 2005 changes between a protruding state protruding forward by the first attacker solenoid 2109 and a retreating state retreating backward, and is normally in the protruding state. On the other hand, according to the result of the hit determination to be drawn by detecting the entry of a game ball by the first left starting port sensor 4002a, the first right starting port sensor 4002b, and the second starting port sensor 4004, That is, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit", the state changes from the protruding state to the retracted state.

  In addition, the second special winning opening 2005b has an opening / closing member, and when the opening / closing member is in the retracted state, it is possible to receive a game ball driven into the right side of the center role 2500. The second special winning opening 2005b is located near the junction of the game ball flowing down the first passage 2012 and the game ball flowing down the second passage 2013, and the opening and closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is retracted. In the state, the game balls distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2013 by the distribution member 2011 can be received with a high probability. That is, when the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is in the retracted state, it is possible to efficiently enter the second special winning opening 2005b simply by hitting a game ball on the right side of the center role 2500. Note that a second count sensor 4005b for detecting an accepted game ball is provided in the second big winning opening 2005b.

  The opening and closing member of the second big winning opening 2005b changes between a protruding state protruding forward by the second attacker solenoid 2110 and a retreating state retreating backward, and is normally in the protruding state. On the other hand, according to the special lottery result that is determined by detecting the entry of the game ball by the second starting port sensor 4004, that is, when the special lottery result is "small hit", It changes to the evacuation state.

  Further, inside the second winning opening 2005b, there is provided a V winning device 2400 for distributing a game ball received by the second winning opening 2005b to one of the V winning opening 2411 and the discharge opening 2412. I have. The V winning device 2400 includes a rotator 2410 capable of holding the first game ball received by the second winning opening 2005b with the opening / closing member of the second winning opening 2005b being in a retracted state, One winning ball 2411 that can receive the game ball when the rotating body 2410 rotates clockwise while the rotating body 2410 holds one game ball, and one gaming ball is held on the rotating body 2410. The second large winning opening 2005b is provided with an outlet 2412 that allows the player to discharge the game ball when the second and subsequent game balls are received.

  In other words, when the first game ball is received in the second winning opening 2005b after the opening and closing member of the second winning opening 2005b is in the retracted state, the first playing ball is rotated by the rotating body 2410. On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls are received, the second and subsequent game balls are discharged from the discharge port 2412 without being held by the rotating body 2410. Then, when the opening and closing member of the second big winning opening 2005b is returned to the protruding state, the rotating body 2410 is rotated clockwise by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, and one game ball held by the rotating body 2410 becomes the V winning opening. 2411. In addition, after the rotating body 2410 is rotated clockwise by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, the rotating body 2410 is rotated counterclockwise to return to a position where the game ball received in the second winning hole 2005b can be held again. ing.

  From the above, according to the special lottery result that is determined by detecting the entry of the game ball by the second starting port sensor 4004, that is, when the special lottery result is "small hit", from the protruding state The state changes to the evacuation state, and it becomes possible to accept game balls in the second special winning opening 2005b. During this evacuation state (during the small hitting game state), at least one game ball is inserted into the second special winning opening. If the ball can be entered into the 2005b, the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 by the rotating body 2410. Then, a game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, and the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b detect the entering of the game ball, so that a “big hit (grand prize hit)” is obtained. In the same manner as when the special lottery result is "big hit", the opening / closing member of the first special winning opening 2005 changes from the protruding state to the retracted state.

  The V winning opening 2411 is provided with a first V winning opening sensor 4007a and a second V winning opening sensor 4007b as sensors for detecting passing game balls. The outlet 2412 is provided with an outlet sensor 4008 for detecting a passing game ball. According to this, the game ball distributed to the V winning opening 2411 by the rotating body 2410 should be detected by any of the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b. When only one of the sensors is detected, it is determined that a game ball has not entered the V winning opening 2411, thereby preventing an illegal act from being performed. The sum of the number of game balls detected by the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b and the number of game balls detected by the discharge port sensor 4008 is the second count sensor 4005b. Should match the number of game balls detected by the game, and if they do not match, it is determined that no game ball has entered the V winning opening 2411 and the illegal action is prevented. are doing.

  As described above, the second special winning opening 2005b and the first special winning opening 2005 arranged on the lower left side of the second special winning opening 2005b are distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011. The game balls and the game balls distributed to the side of the second passage entrance 2013 (the second passage 2014) are arranged in the flow path after the merging. That is, each of the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 and the game balls distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side is the first large one. It is possible to enter the winning opening 2005 or the second winning opening 2005b. For this reason, although the configuration is such that the game balls are distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (the second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011, the distribution by the distribution member 2011 is performed. In the same manner as in the configuration of a normal gaming machine (a gaming machine having a first winning port 2005 or a second winning port 2005b entered by playing a game ball), the second large game is opened in the big hit game state. There is no hindrance to entering the winning opening 2005b or the first large winning opening 2005 which is opened in the small hitting game state. In other words, by preventing the player from inadvertently incurring disadvantages such as difficulty in entering the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2005b, a big hit game state or a small hit game state can be prevented. The game can be played smoothly.

[5-2. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower left end to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed substantially inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and that a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened between the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1008. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[5-3. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and a back unit attached to the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is smaller than the thickness of the panel holder (game panel 1100), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. 8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel holder of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin).

  In addition, the panel holder includes an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is the same width as the out port 1126 and is depressed forward to the lower end.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder is opened at the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-4. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and the front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below, when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit can be received, and formed on the bottom surface. From the discharge unit 1201.

[5-5. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  In addition, various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transmissive members so that they can be visually checked from the outside. I have. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, particularly, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 or the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 has a surface with poor fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to countermeasures against fraud described below.

[5-6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 119 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator 1401 including one LED for displaying a game state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. , A normal holding display 1408 made up of two LEDs for indicating the number of holdings relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and a lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reserve consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002. From a number display 1404 and eight LEDs for displaying a second special lottery result drawn by accepting a game ball to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display 1405, a second special reserve number display 1406 comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and a first special lottery result or a second special reserve lottery result. (2) When the special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, a round indicator 1407 made up of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2005b. Mainly prepared.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit will be described. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit. The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. I have. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-8. Game board effect display device]
Next, the gaming board effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The game board effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

[6. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, control boards for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120. FIG. 122 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120, and FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing various detection signals input to and output from a connection terminal board for a game ball or the like that relays an electrical connection with the display board. FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 125 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the pachinko machine 1 has, as shown in FIG. 120, a first control unit MCG that performs a process for generating a control power supply (for example, +5 V) and a control related to a game including payout of award balls. And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect related to a game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The two control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[6-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 120, the main control board 1310 of the first control unit MCG that controls the progress of the game controls a power-on process executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the power-on. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in microprocessor for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling game operations and a ROM for temporarily storing various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data; A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors for a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage. It has been.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing improper operation, and the like are also built in.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code having only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is added. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in”) that updates a jackpot determination random number used for determining whether to generate a jackpot game state among various random numbers related to the game. Hard random number circuit 1310an "). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical value range of 0 to 32767 is set as the minimum value in advance in this embodiment), The circuit configuration is such that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a). Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted. Then, once again, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly duplicated based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without overlapping. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, the various signals based on the information are transmitted to the various input terminals. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function without a reset terminal and having no reset function And, it consists of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later, and the information is output. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal based on the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a main control system reset described later. A signal based on the output signal is output from the various output terminals.

  114, a first left starting port sensor 4002a for detecting a game ball entering the first left starting port 2002a, and a first right starting port sensor for detecting a game ball entering the first right starting port 2002b. 4002b, a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A first count sensor 4005a that detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, a second count sensor 4005b that detects a game ball that has entered the second winning opening 2005b, a game that has entered the general winning opening 2001 A general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting a ball, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball passing through a gate portion 2003, and a right side area of a center role 2500. A right area portion entry sensor 4006 for detecting a game ball entered, a V winning port sensor 4007a and a V winning port sensor 4007b for detecting a game ball distributed to the V winning port 2411 in the second winning port 2005b, and a second large button. The detection signal from the discharge port sensor 4008 that detects the game ball distributed to the discharge port 2412 in the winning port 2005b (not allocated to the V winning port 2411) is transmitted to the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5, The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined output port based on a detection signal from each of these switches, so that a main control output circuit with a reset function is provided. The control signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a drive signal to the solenoid 2110 or outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca from an output terminal of a predetermined output port, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the panel relay board 4161 Then, via the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reserve number display 1404, the second special reserve number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display For example, a drive signal is output to the display device 1401 and the round display device 1407.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) relating to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined output port, the main circuit with a reset function For example, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first left starting port sensor 4002a, the first right starting port sensor 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the gate sensor 4003, the right area portion entry. While a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 4006, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, the second V winning opening sensor 4007b, and the outlet sensor 4008, the general winning opening sensor 4020 is used. Uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first left starting port 2002a, the first right starting port 2002b, and the second starting port 2004, and frequently passes through the gate section 2003 and the right area section entry sensor 4006. The detection of a game ball by the first left starting port sensor 4002a, the first right starting port sensor 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the right area entry sensor 4006 frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first left starting port sensor 4002a, the first right starting port sensor 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the right area entry sensor 4006. In addition, when a big hit game state or a small hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2005b are opened, and the game ball frequently enters, and Since the game balls are frequently distributed to the V winning opening 2411 and the discharging opening 2412 in the winning opening 2005b, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b. Also, the detection of the game ball by the outlet sensor 4008 frequently occurs. Therefore, the detection of the game ball by the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, the second V winning opening sensor 4007b, and the outlet sensor 4008 frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 4020 does not frequently occur. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 4020.

  The main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that an input from the main control input circuit 1310b to the predetermined serial input port is performed. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function as serial data. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. BC0 (see FIG. 132). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are provided when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, and an operation signal from the operation switch 954 (RAM clear signal). Is output from the dispensing control board 951, is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. (Cleared).

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 121, a payout control board 951 that controls payout of game balls and the like among the first control unit MCG includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1. An operation switch 954 also having a function as a RAM clear switch is a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. .) Is output as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[6-2-1. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 121, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls a power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and pays out a game medium that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power-on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands including a payout control program for controlling the operation and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a drive signal to output to a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. For exchanging various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit 6. It includes a CR unit output circuit 952e of the. The payout control MPU 952a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are built in.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program converts various types of game-related information (game information) and various types of payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 into a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to a first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 through the payout control I / O port 952b as serial data of the serial system as a signal (command transmission means). The payout control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process was executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process was executed to start the payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated by operating the operation switch 954, and output of warning information according to the error is stopped (error canceling control unit).

  When a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command). When a detection signal (main frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal at its various input terminals for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b outputs various signals based on the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches, which are input to the various input terminals, by the dispensing control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The dispensing control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Dispensing control output circuit 952ca having a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and dispensing control output circuit 952cb having no reset function having no reset terminal and having no reset function. And, it consists of. The payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a later-described dispensing control system reset. , Is configured as a circuit in which no signal is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a dispensing control system reset described later. A signal based on the output signal is output from the various output terminals.

  An out-of-ball detection sensor 827 for detecting an out-of-ball of a game ball in the supply path of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball released from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 for detecting the rotation of the discharge blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the discharge control MPU 952a via the discharge control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are supplied to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the interface.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data system, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. ) Is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. Upon normal completion of receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with reset function. By outputting the signal to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

  The dispensing control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb, thereby performing the dispensing control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, so that the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Output a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, output a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and output the status of the pachinko machine 1 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port to an error LED display. By outputting a drive signal to be displayed on 860b to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, the drive signal from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is output to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830) is given, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means “ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. At the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, the payout rotator and the game ball engage with each other near the entrance, so that the payout rotator becomes difficult to rotate. Notification) and the number When “3” is displayed, it is notified that “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it is notified that "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the fullness detection sensor 279, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored gaming balls). Is displayed, and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR not connected" (that the electrical connection has been cut in any one from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “stocking (prize ball stock (unpaid) is present)” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is predetermined). That the number of balls has been reached).

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, so that the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Then, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (built-in with built-in infrared LED and photo IC), and through the plurality of photocouplers, a game room (a hall). ), The number of game balls and various information (game information, error contents relating to the payout operation of game balls or the fact that there is an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal plate 784 and the hole computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hole computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hole computer to operate. The computer does not malfunction or break down. The main computer 1310 that progresses the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout and the like are provided. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first transmitted to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball renting device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner. The input is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of lent game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball rental display unit 330 to the game ball. It is output to the equal lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the ball lending display unit 330. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending display unit 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 132) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. I have. The payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even when the power is turned off by the capacitor BC1 in the power-off processing. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, the operation signal is transmitted to the predetermined information of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU 952a is input to the input terminal of the input port, and determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[6-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the connection terminal board for rental devices such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (Accurately, the connection terminal plate 869 for a game ball or the like rental device is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , CR unit 6 and game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and main door relay is performed. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected.) Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. Each wiring (harness) is electrically connected between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the board with the connection terminal board 869 for a game ball or the like and the frequency display board 365. In addition, AC 24 V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) and the ground voltage LG. The game ball or the like is supplied to the payout control board 951 via the connection terminal board 869, and the game ball or the like is supplied to the frequency display board 365 via the connection terminal board 869 or the main door relay terminal board 880. .

  On the frequency display plate 365, a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the component surface, and a push button switch is positioned at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. Is mounted, and a ball return display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

  The ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. The input is made to the CR unit 6 via a ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball or other lending device connection. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

  The ball lending display unit 330 includes three segment indicators arranged in a line. The three-digit segment indicators are sequentially driven one digit at a time. The lighting of the digit segment indicator is controlled. By such lighting control, the ball rental display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6, or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (total of three signals) for specifying a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment displays, and the specified one-digit segment display. Are turned on and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (total of seven signals) for designating the content to be displayed are provided from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input via the plate 880, the one-digit segment display is sequentially lit according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays are displayed. The content by the light emission of the container can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363.

  Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental display section 330. The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL via a CR unit lamp 365d, a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the like. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by a built-in voltage generation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this emission can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending display unit 330 through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of balls to be loaned in one payout operation (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen). Is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has been started or ended, to a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. And a PRDY signal for notifying that a payout operation for paying out a lending ball is possible or impossible is output to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board for connecting a lending device for a gaming ball or the like. 869, and output to the CR unit 6. For example, when the clerk of the hall or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that a game ball for 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession. When 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out continuously, and 50 balls for 200 yen in total are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of paid out game balls as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[6-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 that can be electrically connected to or cut off from 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from a pachinko island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launch device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[6-3-1. Power control section]
The power supply control unit 935 operates the power switch 934 to rectify 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor improving circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power supply generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

[6-3-2. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 953 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a controls the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302. And a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not to forcibly stop launching (firing) a game ball according to the player's will. Is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the firing control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal for notifying the fact via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a controls a drive current for launching (firing) a game ball toward the game area 5a based on an operation signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307, and outputs the current to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 through the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, The control of sending the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball firing device 650 is performed.

[6-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. An effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. 19, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side effect display device 1600 and a door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, and also controls sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information for specifying the date, hour, minute, and second. A real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information for specifying And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the knob portion volume such as music or sound effects flowing from Part speaker 573.

[6-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time elapses from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls a staging operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various types of information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and various light emission modes such as LEDs) that are continued across the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a blank signal is input Manage schedule data that defines Control RAM 1511c for storing information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state, information for managing a special effect flag, and the like. ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c cannot hold the stored contents only for a time period in which the power is restored immediately after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-term power interruption occurs). ) Loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”). As a result, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1 by providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d stores the stored contents. You can't keep it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When the timer is up, a reset is performed by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up). When outputting the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on the various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 A game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on a lamp from a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting drive signals to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. A signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, Motor output data for outputting a drive signal to the dynamic drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 And the door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 via the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the. The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits data from the LED serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressing detection switch for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the rendering operation unit 400. Are serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, which are input to the serial I / O port for effect operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to a game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized transmission data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). Diagnosis of whether or not.

[6-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 124, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviated Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I around a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. / Peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from and to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak are read and written various data via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d; A dedicated controller for independently transferring data between the I / O port 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. To DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af. In order to perform data transfer independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading / writing from / to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ab g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Without input / output devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, while reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I / O port for a motor drive board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, a main control board serial I / O port, and a production operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When the timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal, a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, etc., and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-luminance white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by employing a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. As a result, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. Note that the lighting control of the LED is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like except this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control potentiometer 1510a. When the knob of the volume control potentiometer 1510a is rotated, the resistance value is variable, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is controlled. The voltage divided according to the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to a game effect are notified. (For example, to render the screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 as a more powerful one, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player, etc.). Is also transmitted from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without any dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing a wrongdoing, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be output. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a player's misconduct due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, In addition to music and sound effects, it is possible to produce a more powerful screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 or to shift to a game state advantageous to the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

[6-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data in advance. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. , Sound generation schedule data for generating sound and sound effects, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Have been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured such that light emission data defining the light emission mode of various LEDs is arranged in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of a built-in sound source of a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or may be used when power is supplied to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copied data is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b includes, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, for correcting the brightness of the game board effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. The date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is obtained based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600. For example, the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time are included. Thus, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board-side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the setting information being 75%, the correction information acquired for the 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% further added by 5%, and the game board side is turned on. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power supply of the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information is acquired. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired for the 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board-side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, and the backlight is turned on.

[6-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 124, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores, among the various types of information updated by the execution of various control programs, the information to be backed up exclusively. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing a copy of various control programs stored therein, and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. And a control data copy area 1511ce for exclusively storing copied data, and backup non-management for exclusively storing, among various information updated by execution of various control programs, those not to be backed up. And a target work area 1511cf.

  Note that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power failure due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and is cleared to zero, while the backup is performed. Regarding the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 146) starts RAM clearing. (For example, for instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 127 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described below. ) Is backed up as a backup target, and effect information (1 ms), which is various information updated in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. And Bank0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various information. Subsequent “0” means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In other words, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, it is appended to “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The same applies to the backup information (1fr).) “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank0”, “Bank1”, where the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. And "Bank 4" (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab. This is a storage area in which door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In a received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received, and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). This is a storage area in which various information obtained from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set. Other schedule data are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai. A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position, the movable position, and the like of various movable bodies is set. ai includes various kinds of information (for example, the effect of the operation operation) of acquiring the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400 are set. In the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the effect display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data. Directed with peripheral control board 1510 based on LOCKN signal to be described later output to convey A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  When the peripheral control unit regular processing described later is executed, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board-side light-emitting data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit regular processing is executed, the processing is performed based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab stores the door side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. −DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. You. When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing is performed based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf includes a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. −DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door decoration is performed in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed is set. The processing proceeds on the basis of this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It has become.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of presentation information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the effect information (1 ms), which is the content copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms). When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs as the effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511 cc is managed as one page, with one pair of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) and one pair of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms). The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511 cc is a pair of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) and a pair of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms), for a total of two pairs. This area is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) as the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as effect backup information (1 ms), each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[6-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing backup information among various information updated by execution of various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d include a power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power recovery due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (see FIG. 146). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, an instruction to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 120 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). ) Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the above-described point that the backup management work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Also, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. Is to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit game state) Etc.), while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is used for effect information (SRAM), which is various information continued over the day (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state or for managing a special effect flag). Information) is stored as a backup target exclusively for Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit that indicates the size of a storage area for storing various information, and “Bank” is Subsequent “0” means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4" provided in an area from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means having a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is to be backed up. , And “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are used in the same sense).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of effect information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the second backup area 1511dc, one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing this pair as one page, with the Bank1 (SRAM) and the Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and the backup second area. An area 1511dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, with Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[6-4-2. LCD display controller]
As shown in FIG. 123, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is as shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. VDP (Video Display)
A liquid crystal and sound control for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of a screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. ROM 1512b, audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, and the like as audio data toward frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and drawing data serialized to door frame side effect display device 460. The door frame side effect transmitter which is arranged near the lower part of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the third plate unit 320 and transmits to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320. Output from IC 1512d and peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral controller 1511 Circuit 1512e for differentiating the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, into a plus signal and a minus signal, and a signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d, and a differential circuit 1512e. When the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit this signal, while the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input. And a forced switching circuit 1512f which is connected to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b includes, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later, and an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and volume adjustment icon In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, etc., the body frame back image data used for displaying the body frame back image in which the position of each part on the back of the body frame 4 can be viewed from the player, the display of the service mode screen Break used to display the service mode screen image data and the break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used to display a suggestion display object for urging the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data According to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae, the next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source is incorporated. Output to VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, transmits the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time a V blank signal is input. Then, one by one from the top screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound instruction data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After being extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. The next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 in accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae. Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in chronological order in the sound generation schedule data and the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. In each case, the data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the head sound command data.

[6-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is inputted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, based on the inputted screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data and generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. A built-in VRAM (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in VRAM”) is also provided. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data is sent from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay. The effect display that is arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board effect display device 1600 are Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is, as described above, the peripheral data. Since the control board 1510 is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1, the V-by-One ( (Registered trademark) ", the system is less affected by noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a serial interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel system. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d, and is stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to effect display drive board 4450. The serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a becomes: Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, sprite data is created, and one screen (1) is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the game board effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for effect display device 460 is shown from channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” refers to rendering data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 in the built-in VRAM. The data to be generated above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may be slightly changed.

  The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. The “frame buffer method” means that one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). In this system, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460.

  When the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the tracks according to the track numbers specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel numbers. An output channel is set, and music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume values are included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as a sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of a channel to be output. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the sound is amplified to a master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified to the master volume value, and the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is increased. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among a plurality of tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are The set volume control volume 1510a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually compared with the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the Volume control button set as a sub-volume value to adjust the volume of the notification sound built into the track And the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound becomes the volume actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It amplifies to the master volume value, serializes the amplified notification sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, in the case where the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of outputting the notification sound in order to notify the clerk of the hall or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 will be briefly described. To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound Is synthesized with the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually converted to the speaker 921. And a master volume value, which is a sound volume flowing from the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized to audio data. And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as data.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows actually from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the production sound progressing in accordance with the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial operation of the production operation unit 400). If the setting is shifted to the setting mode by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows to notify the clerk of the hall or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the silenced production sound proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data. When the sound does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start flowing again from where the notification sound started flowing, but proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed after the notification sound started flowing. It starts to flow again from.

[6-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 125, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. , And various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[6-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data into a positive signal and a negative signal as serial data of a differential system, and outputs a peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and as differential serial data in which left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. , Via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a plus signal of left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[6-4-2d. Door frame side effect transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 125, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, as shown in FIG. As described above, the channel CH2 uses the interface based on the parallel system. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , Green video signal, and blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, that is, a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower two bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to distinguish, the lower two bits that are output from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a and contain the weak color information are invalidated.

  Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Are input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs three image signals of a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. A signal and a clock signal are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and only one differential pair cable is used. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, so that the path from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600 is provided. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door. Since the signal is output (transmitted) to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the path from the channel CH2 to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side (No. Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

  Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite side of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. On the side of the main frame 4, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 and the upper plate 321 is provided on the closed side of the main body frame 4. A full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching out the paid game balls to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is provided. In addition, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility, is arranged. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the noise due to the electrostatic discharge by the game balls, and the like. In an environment that receives noise and the like that has entered the vehicle.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is much longer than that of the channel CH1, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the product of "Thine Electronics Co., Ltd." By adopting the differential-type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less affected by noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential one pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. Is not a parallel line provided simply in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, a brief description will be given of a case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the electronics for the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are provided by THine Electronics. Even if a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise by adopting a differential communication method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Co., Ltd., such a hardware-based configuration alone causes an electrostatic discharge of a game ball. When serial data in the parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko machine where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. For effect on the door frame side provided on the drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) at the time of reception by the transceiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The frame data is received by the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as disturbed data different from the normal data, and in the display area of the door frame-side effect display device 460, an image such as a so-called sandstorm is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The directing transmitter IC 1512d employs a differential-type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make the mechanism less susceptible to noise. In addition to such a hardware configuration, A twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. Thus, even if the serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by the noise due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball, the noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, the liquid crystal display control unit 151 is displayed in the door frame side effect display device 460. Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm that cannot be recognized at all from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 In the connection between the two, ie, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally formed, but are separately assembled, and the structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the body frame 4 is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Accordingly, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is removed from the main frame 4 so that the maintenance of the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed. If it is not possible to solve the problem occurring in the door frame 3, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side are provided. The substrate can be electrically connected to the substrate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs the differential communication “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Was employed as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver. More specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive. Each of the substrates and the substrate 4450 is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while each of power supply wires and other wires for transmitting various signals is electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided. Power supply wiring patterns and other signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates such as a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on the plurality of relay terminal plates is formed. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of a signal for transmitting serial data by the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is reduced. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cable, one of the wires is red, the other is gray, the power supply wires of the harness are red, and the other wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may not be red, but may be yellow.

[6-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. In the differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data). The LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the operation, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 Is transmitted as a request to confirm the operation of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forcible switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected to transmit the two signals, while When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. Have been. Accordingly, when two signals that have been differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected so as to be transmitted so that the two signals are transmitted. From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit connection is performed so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 8 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a period of displaying the startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on on the gaming board effect display device 1600, or performing a demonstration by the gaming board effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and converts various serialized signals. And a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V for restoring the signal to a parallel signal and outputting it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Upon receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal (to be described later) for notifying the drawing data to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying the predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal and output the image to the game board effect display device 1600. Is displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 to notify the user.

  Further, when the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 transmits the LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Then, the signal is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the control unit. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that no problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the plate unit of the door frame 3 While it can be determined that a failure has not occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the 320, if no LOCKN signal has been input, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a failure has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “A failure has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.”) Play the game board side by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In addition to outputting to the display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device.") To that effect is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided on the door frame 3. Thereby, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[6-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 123, the RTC control unit 4165 that stores calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around an RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is employed in this embodiment) as a drive power supply and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without supplying any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the calendar information and time information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the above-described peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets the acquired calendar information and time information in the acquired calendar information and time information. The effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be developed. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the LED luminance setting information when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is of an LED type. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by the PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted with the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The luminance of the LED as the backlight of the board-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460 is included.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information in addition to calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date, hour, minute, and second that is first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to.

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the production line of the gaming machine maker. In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information is input on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the hour, minute, and second.

  As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is mounted with the LED type. The information that needs to be maintained can be stored and held independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of a large hit game state occurring at a low probability or a high probability).

  Also, depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time. Sometimes, it is too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The calendar information and the time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is desired. Or to adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is of an LED type, the game board effect is displayed. The luminance decrease due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and sets the calendar information and time to specify the date. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information specifying the minute and second, and the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% is adjusted in 5% steps. Brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for performing the setting and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, if June has already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board effect display 1600 is turned on, the 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% further increased by 5%, which is the correction information obtained for the game. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information being 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or the peripheral date and time described later. The current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510, and the current date and time may be specified.

[6-4-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume of the volume control volume 1510a is variable when the knob is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob of the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 values from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1, (E.g., the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered more powerful, or the player is informed that there is a high possibility of transition to a game state advantageous to the player, etc.). Etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without any dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, and the sound from the mute is generated. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (the sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing a wrongdoing, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be output. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a player's misconduct due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, the screen developed by the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, and is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be shifted to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. I have. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. , But is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or the notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music and the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. And adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation to increase or decrease the value of the board volume, thereby adjusting the volume of music or sound effects. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the hall clerk who can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, the sound volume adjusted by the hall clerk may be small for the player and difficult to hear the music and sound effects, or may be large for the player and feel noisy for the music and sound effects. Therefore, within a predetermined time after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the user operates the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, enters a waiting state for customers, and performs a demonstration using the game board effect display device 1600. If the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult to hear the music and the sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the clerk of the hall low, the effect operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired volume. If the volume adjusted by the store clerk feels loud and the music and sound effects are loud, the production operation unit By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a state in which no game is performed in the pachinko machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, the state becomes a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. Accordingly, when the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time feels that the adjusted volume is low and it is difficult to hear music and sound effects, this time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player playing the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 to increase the volume up to a desired volume. If the player who has been playing feels loudly at the volume adjusted by the player and feels loud about the music and sound effects, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time can use the dial operation unit 401 of the staging operation unit 400 or the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[7. Various commands related to transmission and reception of main control board
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 126 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. FIG. 127 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 127 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 127, and FIG. 129 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board by the main control board. First, a prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described. Subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[7-1. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensors 4002a and 4002b, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When a signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (the payout device 830) to drive the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates. When a game ball is paid out (a device for paying out game balls) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. Commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared for the prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951. One prize ball is designated by the command 10H, and the command 11H is specified. , Two prize balls are specified,..., 15 prize balls are specified in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout control board 951 to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball rental machine (a device for directly paying out game balls as a rental ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 which is a storage plate) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is provided. When the ball lending machine 1 is electrically connected to the ball lending machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the main control board 1310 moves to the payout control board 951. , A command 20H to a command 2EH are prepared, a command 20H specifies one prize ball, a command 21H specifies two prize balls,..., A command 2EH Fifteen balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout control board 951 to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 126 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the command 30H specifies a self-check.
The transmission side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as the command reception confirmation is not input from the reception side for a predetermined period after the command transmission. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine according to the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[7-2. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating an effect variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 127 and FIG. 128, the various commands are as follows: special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit related, power-on, normal figure synchronized effect related, ordinary power actor related, information display, state It is classified into indication and others.

[7-2-1. Special Figure 1 Synchronization Direction Related]
The special effect 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 127. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named as "Start special figure 1 synchronizing effect", "Specify special symbol 1", "End special effect 1 synchronizing effect", and "Specify fluctuation state". To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronizing effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) specified in the mode. The non-specific jackpot is designated, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command instructs the end of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the change state designation command instructs the gaming state. Note that the gaming state includes a time-saving state that indicates that the game is in the time-saving state, and a non-hour-saving state (normal game state) that indicates that the game is not in the time-saving state. Here, in the time reduction state, for example, the time period in which the normal symbol is fluctuated and displayed by the normal symbol display device 1402 is shortened as compared with the non-time reduction state (normal game state), and the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result is stopped and displayed. By doing so, the number of times of stop display of the normal lottery result by the normal lottery described later in the predetermined time is increased compared to the non-time saving state, and further, the period in which the second starting port door 2022 is operated to protrude is set to the non-time saving state (normal A state in which it is possible to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity without decreasing the number of possessed balls by increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 by making the game ball longer than the game state). Then, as compared with the non-time saving state, the number of determinations as to whether or not to make the second starting port door 2022 protrude is increased. By lengthening the duration of the protruding operation of the mouth door 2022, a game ball acceptance rate of the second start hole 2004 state of increasing (ball entrance ratio)). Note that even when such a time-saving state is ended and the normal start-up state (non-time-saving state) is controlled when the second starting port door 2022 is in the protruding state, the second starting port 2004 is previously set in the second starting port 2004. When a predetermined number of game balls are not received, the protruding state can be maintained even after the normal game state (non-time saving state) is controlled. However, when a predetermined closing condition (a predetermined number of game balls has been received or a predetermined opening time has elapsed) is satisfied in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the maintained protrusion is maintained. The state ends and the state is set to the evacuation state.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when the machine is controlled to the time saving state, when the player hits right, the game ball is inserted into a winning opening such as the first right starting port 2002b or the second starting port 2004. When the expected prize ball acquisition expected value to be paid out based on the acceptance of the prize ball is compared with the consumption amount of the possessed ball required to obtain the expected prize ball acquisition expected value, Is set to be larger. Therefore, when the time saving state is controlled, for example, in a situation where the number of suspensions of the jackpot determination reaches the upper limit, it can be said that it is desirable for the player not to newly launch the game ball. .

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 change, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect starts. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure hit information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[7-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
Special figure 2 entrainment effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 120. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands named start of special figure 2 tuning effect, designation of special symbol 2 and end of special figure 2 tuning effect. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronizing effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) specified in the mode. The non-specific jackpot is designated, and the end of the special figure 2 tuning effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 tuning effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 change, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 tuning effect starts. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[7-2-3. Jackpot-related]
As shown in FIG. 127, the categories of jackpot-related are, as shown in FIG. 127, a jackpot opening, a jackpot opening 1 Nth display, a jackpot 1 closing display, a jackpot 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, and a jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the jackpot opening 1 opening Nth display command starts during the opening of the jackpot 1 of the 1st to 15th rounds (Nth opening of the first jackpot 2005). The opening command of the special winning opening 1 is instructed during the opening of the round, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is started during the closing of the special winning opening 1 between rounds (during the closing or the closing of the first special winning opening 2005 between rounds). ), And the special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls having a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (the first count sensor 4005a shown in FIG. 120 detects the number of game balls). The jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending and the jackpot ending command. Handle display command is an indication of a big hit pattern information display.

  The small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command starts during the small hit opening (during the small hit, opening or opening of the second big winning opening 2005b). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium and large winning opening winning effect (a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 2005b during the small hit is detected by the second count sensor 4005b). The small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the big hit opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 15th rounds is opened (the first big winning opening). The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted at the time of opening the Nth round of 2005), and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the closing of the first special winning opening 2005) to display the special winning opening 1 count. The command is issued when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the special winning opening 1 (when the first special winning opening 2005 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the first special winning opening 2005 is detected by the first count sensor 4005a. The big hit ending command is transmitted when the big hit ending is started, and the big hit symbol display command is sent when the big winning opening is opened (first time). It is sent to open at the time) of the winning port 2005.

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (at the time of the small hit, when the second big winning opening 2005b is opened), and the small hit count is transmitted. The display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit middle and large winning opening (when a game ball hitting the second big winning opening 2005b during the small hit is detected by the second count sensor 4005b), and the small hit ending command is transmitted. Is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process in step S16 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 127, the category of power-on is composed of a command at the time of power-on and a command named main control return destination at power-on. To these various commands, “D * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is issued when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power is restored). When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, the information instructs the user to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, the power is restored when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored). ) Includes information indicating which of the above-mentioned time-saving states and non-time-saving states to return to, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when each of the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet type is created, what kind of work is for the copyright, what kind of game specification (for example, a probability variation occurs) In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the change of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) (A so-called ST machine). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to identify the type code among the Max type, Middle type, and Sweet digital type that indicate the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. The copyright code and the game specification (for example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability fluctuation in the state where the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation is limited And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine or the like) in which the game occurs.

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command includes information indicating the driving state of the second starting port solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 120 and the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2109 and the second attacker solenoid 2110 shown in FIG. And instructing information.

  The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is as follows: when the main control board power is turned on (when power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, Is also transmitted.). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the power-on state command and the power-on The control return destination command is transmitted.

[7-2-5. Related to tsuzu productions]
The general figure synchronizing effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 120, and is divided into the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the box 1402, such as start of general figure synchronizing effect, designation of general pattern, end of general figure synchronizing effect, and designation of state at the time of change. To these various commands, "E * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general figure synchronization production start command (general figure fluctuation pattern command) instructs the start of the general figure synchronization production with the production pattern (general figure fluctuation pattern) specified in the mode. A jackpot or a non-specific jackpot is designated. The general figure synchronizing effect end command instructs the general figure synchronizing effect end, and the fluctuating state specifying command instructs the gaming state. As described above, the game state includes a time-saving state that indicates that the game is in the time-saving state, and a non-time-saving state that indicates that the game is not in the time-saving state (normal game state).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general figure synchronizing effect start command is transmitted at the start of normal symbol fluctuation, the general pattern designating command is transmitted immediately after the general figure synchronizing effect starts, and the general figure synchronizing effect end command is The normal symbol change time elapses (when the normal symbol is determined), and the change state designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol omission information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the ordinary symbol command control process of step S17 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-6. Ordinary electric production related)
The normal electric production effect-related relates to the second starting port door 2022 which is moved forward and backward by driving the second starting port solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 120. As shown in FIG. It is composed of commands called opening, opening of public telephone, and ending per ordinary figure. To these various commands, “F * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per ordinary figure is for instructing the start of opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for ordinary electric power is started during opening of the ordinary electric power. The ending command per ordinary figure indicates the start of ending per ordinary figure.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per ordinary figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for the ordinary electric power is transmitted when the ordinary electric power is opened (when the second starting opening door 2022 is set to the second starting opening solenoid 2108). Is transmitted at the time of protruding forward), and the ending per-figure-ending command is transmitted at the start of the ending per-figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the ordinary symbol command control process of step S17 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-7. Notification]
As shown in FIG. 128, the notification display section includes commands having the names of winning a prize display, connection failure display, disconnection / short-circuit failure display, magnetic detection switch failure display, door open, and door close. To these various commands, “6 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The prize abnormal display command indicates that a game ball enters the first prize port 2005 or the second prize port 2005b when a prize is won at any time other than during a big hit (during the operation of the condition device) (even though it is not a big hit). When the count sensor 4005 detects the game ball, the start of the winning abnormality notification is instructed. The connection abnormality display command is, for example, a path extending between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. In this case, when there is an electrical connection abnormality, the start of connection abnormality notification is instructed. For example, the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes a main control board 1310, first start-up port sensors 4002a and 4002b, and second start-up. When a disconnection or short circuit occurs in the electrical connection with the mouth sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, or the like, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display is displayed. Is intended to instruct the start, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 120.

  The door opening command is issued by the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door is open, the door frame is instructed to be notified. The door frame closing command is used to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In this state, the instruction to end the door opening notification is issued. On the other hand, based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the main frame 4 is in the open state, the main frame closing command is issued. The main frame closing command is transmitted to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a winning is made to a special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operation of the condition device), and a connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. The command is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of sending the command to the first starting port sensors 4002a and 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the first starting port sensor 4004b. Any of the count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, and the like becomes disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619), The frame closing command is transmitted when the main frame closing is detected (when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the switch processing of step S12 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[7-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 128, the status display section is composed of commands called a frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error clearing navigation command (corresponding to an error clearing command), and a frame status 2 command. I have. To these various commands, “7 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are each commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. The command is set as the status, and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1310a adds “7 * H” as additional information to the received commands. Thus, the command is formed into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error release navigation, the error release navigation command is transmitted during the error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. Note that these shaped frame state 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the switch processing of step S12 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[7-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 128, the test related section is composed of various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as the status and “** H” as the mode (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 123). Inspection of various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

  The test command is transmitted at a timing other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side game control main described later is performed. A test command is transmitted in the initialization processing of step S1 in the processing.

[7-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 128, the other divisions include start opening winning, change shortening operation end designation, special symbol 1 storage, special symbol 2 storage, special symbol type prefetching, fluctuation pattern prefetching, gate passing, ordinary symbol storage, ordinary symbol storage. It is composed of a command named symbol type prefetching and ordinary figure fluctuation pattern prefetching. These various commands are assigned “9 * H” as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of a starting opening winning effect, and is used when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002a, 2002b based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002a, 4002b. The start of the effect and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 are respectively instructed. The command instructs a state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (the game balls are stored in the first starting ports 2002a and 2002b). Is entered, and the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 informs the number of balls (number of reserves) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol variation display on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400). The special symbol type look-ahead command indicates that the special symbol 1 hold is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 in the special symbol variation display. Before being used, the display result (missing symbol, big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the prefetching and the special symbol 1 reservation and the special symbol 2 reservation are displayed in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Before the special symbol is used in the variable display of the special symbol 1405, the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the pre-reading and the special symbol 2 reservation (small hit symbol, large symbol) The variable pattern prefetch command is a prefetching command before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. Then, before the variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 suspension and the special symbol 2 suspension are used for the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400. , And a variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol based on the pre-reading and the special symbol 2 reservation. The gate passing command is for instructing the passing of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is usually 0 to 4 symbol holdings (the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the function display unit). The 1400 ordinary symbol display 1402 informs the number of balls (number of reserves) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the ordinary symbol. The ordinary symbol type pre-read command indicates that the ordinary symbol hold is the ordinary symbol of the function display unit 1400. Before the display is used for the display of the normal symbol on the display 1402, the display result (missing symbol, symbol per ordinary symbol) by the normal symbol display 1402 based on the prefetching and the normal symbol reservation is designated. As for the figure variation pattern pre-reading command, the ordinary symbol hold is used for the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400. A, it is used to specify the read-ahead to widely view the variation pattern to be used in variable display of normal symbol based upon the normal symbol reserved.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning command (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002a, 2002b based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002a, 4002b). Or, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004), mainly from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command is transmitted to notify that effect by voice, and is transmitted at the end of the suspension period after the fluctuation is determined (after the loss suspension period has elapsed) after the specified number of fluctuations have been reduced, and the special symbol 1 is transmitted. The memory command is issued when the number of special design 1 operation pending balls changes (when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002a, 2002b and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves increases, the first special The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 is used to display a special symbol on the symbol display 1403 and the number of reserved symbols is reduced. When the number of reserved balls increases due to the ball entering the ball, or when the number of reserved balls is reduced from the number of reserved balls using the second special symbol display 1405 to display special symbols, the number of reserved balls is transmitted. The look-ahead command is transmitted when the number of special symbols 1 and 2 operation-reserved balls increases (when game balls enter the first starting ports 2002a and 2002b or the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases), and the fluctuation pattern is changed. The prefetch command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the special symbol type prefetch command. These various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process in step S16 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  Further, the gate passing command is transmitted when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the number of the normal symbol operation reserved balls changes (the number of reserved balls has increased due to the passing of the game ball through the gate unit 2003). Or when the number of reserved symbols is reduced by using the ordinary symbol display 1402 to change the number of retained symbols by using the ordinary symbol display 1402 based on the number of retained symbols. (When the number of game balls passes through the gate unit 2003 and the number of pending games increases), and the ordinary figure variation pattern prefetch command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol type prefetch command is transmitted. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the ordinary symbol command control process of step S17 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002a, 2002b based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002a, 4002b, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004), the sound is mainly transmitted from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to inform the user of the fact. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 123 uses the start port winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification in which the pachinko machine 1 is used to monitor the presence or absence of a fraudulent activity in addition to notifying by sound from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command and does not notify the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by voice.

[7-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the payout control board 951 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the various commands from the payout control board 951 are composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation and frame state 2, and include frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) is provided with a broken ball, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more, a connection error, and a CR not connected. If the ball is broken, bit 0 (B0, “B”) Represents a bit.) Is set to 1, the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) for 50 or more stocks, and the connection is abnormal. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, the value 1 is set in B5, the value 0 is set in B6, and the value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command), a ball watching, a payout detection sensor error and a retry error are prepared, and in the ball watching, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), and the payout detection sensor is set. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the failure of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 127 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that payout of game balls that do not consistently occur due to a retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, Then, the value 0 is set in B7.

  For the frame state 2 command, “without a ball” is prepared, and a value of 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) while the ball is being removed. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, a change of the frame state, and at the time of an error release navigation, and an error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of the error release navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes.

[8. Game content]
Next, the game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is rotated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Then, the ball is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left (left) or the right (right) of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven harder as the clockwise rotation is performed. , A game ball can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the game ball is inserted into the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 in a front view from the highest portion, while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward. When the game ball is discharged from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the ball is accepted by the first left starting port 2002a with high probability because the first left starting port 2002a is located immediately below. When game balls are received in the first left starting port 2002a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the area other than the center into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the first left starting port 2002a. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted in the first left starting port 2002a.

  By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, there is a possibility that the game ball is moved toward the center in the left-right direction by an obstacle nail or the like and accepted by the first left starting port 2002a. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed), On the downstream side, it flows down in an area (a specific area) in which the first right starting port 2002b, the second starting port 2004, the gate unit 2003 and the like are provided. Further, on the upstream side of the specific area, a distribution member 2011 for alternately distributing game balls to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 is provided, and the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011 are provided. Can be received in the first right starting port 2002b and pass through the gate section 2003, and the game balls distributed to the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011 can be received in the second starting port 2004. It is supposed to be.

  When the right-hit game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the main control board 1310 makes a normal determination. In the normal judgment, the winning is made per ordinary figure, and when the selected symbol is indicated in the normal symbol fluctuation, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward and protrudes to the player side (protruding). State), and the game ball that has passed through the receiving port 2016 is received by the second starting port door 2022 and can be received in the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  In the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, when a winning is made per ordinary figure, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 is retreated after the ordinary symbol is stopped in the manner per ordinary figure. Then, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 enters the gaming board 5 (evacuated state). However, even if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the second start-up door 2022 is moved to the protruding state, the predetermined upper limit number (one ball in this example) of game balls is set. When the game ball is received by the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 is retreated at that time to operate to the evacuation state, so that the game ball cannot be received by the second starting port 2004. Become.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first starting port (the first left starting port 2002a, the first right starting port 2002b) or the second starting port 2004, the main operation is started. The control board 1310 determines whether or not to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit gaming state”, “small hitting gaming state”, “time saving state”, etc.) (first special determination). Symbol side or the second special symbol side). In addition, when a big hit is won in the hit determination, the big hit type is determined based on a symbol random number acquired at the time of entering the ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number)), A game privilege (a jackpot gaming state or a gaming state after the jackpot gaming state) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (determined jackpot type) is provided. Similarly, when a small hit is won in the hit determination, the small hit type is determined based on the symbol random number acquired at the time of entering the ball (hereinafter, also referred to as symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number)). Then, a game privilege (small hit game state, a big hit game state executed when a V-prize is won in the small hit game state, and after a big hit game state) corresponding to the determined type of small hit (determined small hit type). Game state).

  When the hit determination is performed, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is variably displayed for the variable time selected based on the result of the hit determination, and then the symbol mode ( By stopping the special symbol with the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol, the player can be recognized. As a result, if the stopped special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is not the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, the starting condition for the next hit determination is satisfied, and the main control board 1310 In the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) held in an unexecuted state, the hit determination with the highest digestion order is digested (executed).

  On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a big hit symbol, a big hit game state in which a prize can be obtained by the player is performed on the main control board 1310. . In executing the big hit gaming state, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the big hit gaming state is performed is generated. Then, when the opening period ends, the predetermined number of rounds predetermined according to the determined jackpot type (in the present embodiment, 10 or 15 rounds when the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, A round game in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened (the first special winning opening 2005 is set in a state capable of accepting a game ball) with an upper limit of 15 rounds when the special symbol is a big hit symbol. One round game is performed until opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 is performed a predetermined number of times (once in the present embodiment), and the specified number ( It is released until a game ball of the winning upper limit: 9 balls in this example) wins or until a specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) elapses. In the round game, a round effect is performed. When the round game of the specified number of rounds ends, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit gaming state is generated, and when the ending period ends, the big hit gaming state ends. Is done.

  If the stopped special symbol (the second special symbol in this example) is a small hit symbol, a small hit game state in which a prize can be obtained by the player is performed on the main control board 1310. In executing the small hitting game state, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the small hitting gaming state is performed is generated. When the opening period ends, the second special winning opening 2005b is opened (the second special winning opening 2005b is set to be able to receive a game ball). In the embodiment, the upper limit is once. During a single open game, a specified number (upper prize number: 9 balls in this example) of game balls is won in the second big winning opening 2005b, or a specified time (open game time: 28 in this example). .5 seconds). In the open game, an open effect is performed. When the opening game of the specified number of times of opening ends, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the small hitting game state is performed, and when the ending period ends, the small hitting game state is generated. Is terminated.

  In addition, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the big hitting game state may be continuously generated after the small hitting game state ends. Specifically, the determination is made on the condition that the game ball wins in the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting game state and the winning game ball is distributed to the internal V winning opening 2411 (V winning). The number of predetermined rounds determined in advance according to the type of the small hit that has been made (10 rounds in the present embodiment when the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, and 15 when the second special symbol is a big hit symbol) A round game in which the first winning port 2005 is opened up to a maximum of (round). Therefore, in the ending effect at the end of the small hitting game state, not only the end of the small hitting game state is indicated, but also the game ball enters the V winning opening 2411 inside the second big winning opening 2005b. It also indicates whether or not the big hit game state is continuously performed from the small hit game state. When the big hitting game state is continuously generated after the small hitting game state ends, the small hitting game state in which the second big winning opening 2005b is opened is one round, and the number including the one round is Until the number of round games reaches the specified number of rounds (from the second round to the fifteenth round), a round game in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened is performed.

  In the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, except for the case where the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the main control board 1310 is controlled to the time saving state after the big hit gaming state ends. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the second special symbol is a big hit symbol, or during the small hitting game state executed based on the second special symbol being a small hit symbol, the gaming ball is set to the V winning opening 2411. Is always controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state. In this time saving state, a result of a normal determination as to whether or not the second starting port 2004 can easily win a game ball is derived as compared with a non-time saving state in which the time saving state does not occur (such as a normal game state). Normally, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is shortened. In addition, in the time saving state, when a win is made per ordinary figure in the normal determination, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 performs a forward and backward operation (forward / backward operation) in a forward / backward pattern different from the non-time saving state. Has become.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of winning per day in a non-time saving state, the forward / backward pattern in which the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 moves forward / backward in a short forward / backward mode (0.2 seconds in this example). On the other hand, in the case where the winning is performed per day in the time-saving state while A is performed, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 moves forward and backward in the long moving mode (6 seconds in this example). Is performed. In other words, the second start port door 2022 of the second start port 2004 is longer in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state and has a longer total protruding time corresponding to one regular drawing, and operates advantageously for the player. It is set as follows. For this reason, in the time reduction state, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 is in a ball entry rate improving state in which the second starting port door 2022 is easy to operate in the protruding state as compared with the case of the non-time saving state, and the right-handed driving is continuously performed. When the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004, the normal symbol change according to the normal determination is easily performed. In the case of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the right-handed player is continuously hit in the time saving state and the right is hit, at least one game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004, while the non-time saving state is used. Even if a right-handed hit is continued when winning per figure, a game ball is rarely accepted in the second starting port 2004.

  In addition, the time saving state according to the present embodiment ends when the symbol change of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, once) after the end of the big hit gaming state. . Similarly, when a small hit symbol (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C) on the second special symbol side and a game ball enters the V winning port 2411 inside the second big winning port 2005b. When the symbol change of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, once) after the big hit game state is completed, the symbol change is ended.

  The specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment are as follows. Eight types of numbers from [1] to [8] are adopted as decorative patterns, and [222] [333] [444] [555] [666] [777] [888] as small hits [111] is adopted as a symbol. Also, 1/300 is defined as the winning probability of the big hit on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side. The winning probability of the small hit on the first special symbol side is 0/300, and the winning probability of the small hit on the second special symbol side is 299/300. 1/20 is defined as the winning probability per ordinary figure. The number of award balls of the game balls is three for the first left starting port 2002a, the first right starting port 2002b, and the second starting port 2004, the first big winning port 2005, and the second big winning port. Fifteen are defined for each of the mouths 2005b. In addition, as the forward / backward pattern A in which the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 moves forward / backward in the short forward / backward mode, the second starting port door 2022 operates once in the protruding state and operates in the protruding state. An aspect in which the protruding state is maintained until 20 ms elapses from the time is specified. Further, as the forward / backward pattern B in which the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 moves forward and backward in the long forward / backward mode, the second starting port door 2022 operates once in the protruding state and operates in the protruding state. The state in which the protruding state is maintained until 6 s elapses is defined. In addition, “1 ball” is defined as the upper limit number of winnings, which is the retreat condition of the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004. In addition, in each round game in the big hit gaming state, “1 time” is set as the number of times the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and “9 balls” is set as the winning maximum number. In the small hitting game state, “one time” is defined as the number of times the second large winning opening 2005b is opened, and “9 balls” is defined as the maximum winning number.

  As described above, in the non-working time state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs, and the receiving of the game ball to the first starting port (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b). Is displayed based on the first special symbol. The game executed in the non-time saving state is a normal game, and is hereinafter referred to as a normal mode.

  In the normal mode (non-time saving state), when a game ball is received in the first starting port (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b), a hit determination is made in the main control board 1310, and a big hit is determined in the hit determination. If it is determined that the winning type has been determined, after determining the type of jackpot relating to whether or not to control the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol mode (big hit symbol, losing Stop the first special symbol. At this time, if the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the big hit gaming state is performed.

  If the big hit type is not controlled after the big hit game state, the normal mode (non-time saving state) is continued again after the big hit game state. On the other hand, if the big hit type is to control to the time saving state after the big hit game state, the control is made to the time saving state after the big hit game state.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the special symbol (the first symbol) is set based on the reception of the game ball to the first left starting port 2002a (the first left starting port 2002a, the first right starting port 2002b) and the second starting port 2004. The first left start port 2002a (the first left start port 2002a, the first right start port 2002b) and the first left start port 2002a (first first start port 2002b) When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) cannot be started, so the special symbol (first special symbol, Until the variable display of the second special symbol stops, the start of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended. The number of storages for the change display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to be held are the first left start port 2002a (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b) and the second left start port 2002a. With respect to the starting port 2004, up to four each are set as the upper limit, and for more than the starting port 2004, game balls are provided to the first left starting port 2002a (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) and the second starting port 2004. Even if is accepted, the start of the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not suspended and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  The variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed under the direct control of the main control board 1310. The variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the function display unit 1400 is performed by blinking a plurality of LEDs for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and then combining the LEDs that are lit. This indicates the result of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (symbol mode according to the result of the hit determination).

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the result of the hit determination as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the hit determination in the effect display device 1600 is a pattern in which three symbol rows composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each symbol row is fluctuated. The columns are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol columns are stopped and displayed such that the symbols of the three symbol columns to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the result of the hit determination. If the result of the hit determination is other than “losing”, after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a final image indicating the result of the hit determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a large hit game state or a small hit game state) according to the result of the hit determination performed occurs.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the result of the hit determination by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 in accordance with the result of the lottery hit determination. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center role 2500, various decorations of the back unit, movable back and rear effect unit, back upper left movable effect unit, back left movable effect unit, back upper It is possible to perform luminous effects, movable effects, display effects, etc. by appropriately using the middle movable effect unit and the underside front movable effect unit, etc., and to entertain the player even with various effects. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, even if there is a first reserved storage number which is a storage number of the hit determination of the first special symbol side which is suspended in an unexecuted state, it is not executed yet. In the case where there is a second reserved storage number which is the storage number of the hit determination of the second special symbol held, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol. It has become. Since the time saving state is not controlled during the big hit game state (it is controlled to the non-time saving state), the result of the determination (normal determination) as to whether or not it is a general hit based on the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 is assumed. Even if the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 moves forward and backward, the moving mode is a short moving mode in which the game ball is hardly received in the second starting port 2004. , The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs. Thus, in the normal mode (non-time saving state), when the first special symbol is variably displayed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, in most cases, the first special symbol is first displayed after the big hit game state. Is fluctuated.

  Further, in this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state is displayed variably with a long fluctuation time (120 seconds in this example) longer than the normal fluctuation time regardless of the result of the hit determination. . Note that the state in which the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed with the long fluctuation time in the time reduction state is a state in which the right to win the big hit of the second special symbol (winning right) can be acquired. That. Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed with the long fluctuating time, a game aimed at passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003 is performed.

  As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a determination is made as to whether or not the game is a normal symbol hit (ordinary determination), and based on the determination result, the normal symbol is variably displayed. When the stop state of the ordinary symbol is a symbol per ordinary symbol, the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to protrude so that game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port When the game ball is received in 2004, the second reserved storage number, which is the storage number of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, increases.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, one of the big hit and the small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit judgment on the second special symbol side. In the case of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, if a small hit is obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, it is determined that even one ball is accepted in the second big winning opening 2005b during the small hit game state. One ball is always assigned to the V winning port 2411. In this example, if the right hit is continued during the small hitting game state, at least one ball is controlled in the second big winning opening 2005b so as to receive a game ball. In other words, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol side hit determination, a large hit is almost always obtained. Therefore, it is practically a small hit as a result of the second special symbol side hit determination. It can be said that the right to win a big hit (winning right) is obtained. That is, the state in which the game ball is accepted by the second starting port 2004 and the second reserved memory number is present is a state in which the right to win a substantial jackpot (winning right) is acquired.

  Then, the first special symbol is stopped in a symbol mode (big hit symbol, lost symbol) according to the result of the hit determination when the long fluctuation time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, if the first special symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the big hit game state is performed. If the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side when starting the big hit game state when there is no two reserved memory numbers is to control the time saving state after the big hit game state, the chance mode is continued and the first special symbol is continued. If the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side at the time of starting the big hit gaming state when there is no second reserved memory number does not control the time reduction state after the big hit gaming state The chance mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is stopped with a lost symbol after the elapse of the long fluctuation time since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, if there is a second reserved memory number, it is shifted to the winning right exercise time, If there is no second reserved storage number, the chance mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  As described above, the winning right exercising time is shifted when there is the second reserved storage number, and a game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed is performed. As described above, in addition to the fact that one of the big hit and the small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, a small hit is obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. In the event of a win, the player has acquired the right to win a substantial jackpot (winning right). Therefore, in the winning right exercising time, the jackpot gaming state is executed by the number of the second reserved storages.

  Specifically, when the process moves to the winning right exercising time, first, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the symbol mode at the time of stopping the second special symbol is a big hit symbol, a big hit game state in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened according to the determined big hit type is executed, and the second special symbol is stopped. If the symbol pattern at the time is the small hit symbol, the small hit game state is executed to make the second large winning opening 2005b acceptable for the game ball, and the gaming ball that has won the second large winning opening 2005b receives the V winning. The big hit game state in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened is executed on condition that the big win game 2005 is opened.

  In this example, the right hit is continued during the small hitting game state, so that at least one ball is controlled in the second big winning opening 2005b so that the game ball can be accepted. When the small hit game state ends without the ball being distributed to the V winning opening 2411, or the big hit game state executed based on the symbol mode at the time of stopping the second special symbol being the big hit symbol has ended. In the case where the big hitting game state executed based on the game balls being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hitting game state is further terminated, the winning right is provided on condition that there is the second reserved memory number. Continue exercise time.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball wins V when the second special symbol is a big hit symbol or during the small hitting game state executed based on the small special hit symbol being a small hit symbol. In the case where the game is distributed to the mouth 2411, the time is always controlled to be reduced after the big hit game state ends. Therefore, based on the case where the small hitting game state is ended without the gaming ball being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hitting game state, or the symbol mode when the second special symbol is stopped becomes the big hit symbol. When the executed big hitting game state ends, and when the big hitting game state executed based on the distribution of the gaming ball to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hitting game state ends, the second reserved storage number If not, a time saving state occurs again, and the mode is shifted to the chance mode.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the game is started in the normal mode, the jackpot is won in the normal mode, and the time-saving state occurs after the jackpot game state, so that the chance mode is more advantageous than the normal mode. And if the player wins the normal judgment during the chance mode, it is in an advantageous state for the player who loops between the winning right time and the chance mode, and if the normal judgment is not won during the chance mode, the chance mode changes to the normal mode. And it is disadvantageous for the player.

[9. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly, the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 131A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a control process performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first performs various registers and main control built-in operations as a process of step S1 on condition that the operation switch 954 is operated. Initialize the data stored in the RAM. The operation switch 954 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The operation switch 954 outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed since the power was turned on, and the main control MPU 1310a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that this is the case, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process of storing information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM is executed. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the backup processing refers to the information stored in the main control built-in RAM without executing the initialization processing (step S1). A restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. When the operation switch 954 is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to an initial state by executing an initialization process without executing a recovery process. When the initialization process is performed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

  Next, as a process of step S2, a random number which is a number updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process on the display mode when the special symbol is stopped in the variable display, and the special symbol A reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the variable random number provided for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control and the special symbol variable display. The reach random number to be subjected to the lottery process, or the symbol random number (first symbol random number, the first symbol random number, A random number (random number) used for the lottery process related to the hitting of the second starting door 2022, and the like. It is equipped with a motor.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, when the first start port (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b) is started and won. , Even when the second starting port 2004 is activated, the reach random number is obtained from the same counter that updates the reach random number. May be obtained from different counters to make the execution ratio of the reach effect different, or as a reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random numbers, a first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second reach determination table. By providing a second reach determination table in which a different decision value is set from the first reach determination table corresponding to the special symbol, the execution ratio of the reach effect is made different. It may be so.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) which are not involved in the random numbers among the random numbers are updated. After the processes in steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process in step S2 is basically repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 131 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (b), in this interrupt control, first, register save processing is performed as the processing of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 4003, the first left starting port sensor 4002a, the first right starting port sensor 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count Detection signals from various sensors such as the sensor 4005b and the above-described general winning opening sensor 4020 are input. Next, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number (special random number, ordinary random number) related to the display mode of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol when the variable display is stopped among the random numbers is updated. An operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol display as the process of step S14. Execute The special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second special symbol process flag) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a hit at the moment of operation of the second start door 2022. In the normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the ordinary symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next executes the special symbol process as the process of step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the above-described normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs an information output process of outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18.

  Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the first left starting port sensor 4002a, the first right starting port sensor 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the first When the detection signals of the count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the like are in an ON state, the payout control board 951 controls the payout control board 951 so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. Execute the prize ball processing to output the command. Thus, the payout control MPU 952a mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when the first left starting port 2002a receives a game ball and the first left starting port sensor 4002a is turned on, and when the first right starting port 2002b receives a game ball, the first right starting port 2002b receives a game ball. When the right starting port sensor 4002b is turned on, “three balls” are set. When a game ball wins the second starting port 2004 and the second starting port sensor 4004 is turned on, “one ball” is set. When a game ball wins in the first big winning opening 2005 and the first count sensor 4005a is turned on, "14 balls", a gaming ball wins in the second big winning opening 2005b and the second count sensor 4005b is turned on. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 2001 and the general winning opening sensor 4020 is turned on, "10 balls" are paid out to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process for checking an increase or decrease in the number of reserved storages as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the constantly operating actuator is performed (step S22), and the contents of the register are restored (step S23). When the interrupt is permitted (step S24), this control ends. Becomes

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process using a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be performed. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 132, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly sets the first start-up port sensor (first The detection signal from the one left starting port sensor 4002a and the first right starting port sensor 4002b) is in an ON state (the first starting port (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) has a ball in). (Step S31), the first special symbol of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and stored in the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second starting opening passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is set. Is performed (step S40). In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the content of the big hit type) in the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating "10R big hit". The first large winning opening 2005 is closed for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first counting sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first large winning opening 2005. The process of controlling the 10R big hit game state in which the opening / closing pattern to be repeated is repeated 10 times is executed, and the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the content of the big hit type) regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is “ When a mode suggesting “15R big hit” is reached, after the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or nine gaming balls are placed in the first big winning opening 2005. It was winning executes a process of controlling the 15R jackpot gaming state repeating 15 times the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the first counting sensor 4005a.

  In the big hit control process, after the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed, the time saving flag setting process is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving control (control executed in the time-saving state) is being executed, and is set when the big-hit game state based on the big-hit in which the time-saving control is performed after the big-hit game state ends, and will be described later. This is reset in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 143 or the second special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 146 described later. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of times saved is set to one, the time saving control is started after the end of the big hitting game state, and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed once. The time-saving control is terminated when the time is reached.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being controlled is set (step S36). If the hit execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a mode suggesting “small hit”, the second big winning opening 2005b is set for a predetermined period ( After the second count sensor 4005b detects that the game ball has been opened or that one game ball has been awarded in the second special winning opening 2005b, the process is closed. When a game ball that has won the second winning opening 2005b enters the V winning opening 2411, the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and the first winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated 14 times, and a transition to a 15R big hit game state is performed.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets a second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area if neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set. On the condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38). On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not "0" (step S37), the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. A second special symbol process including a lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the first starting port passage processing (step S32).

  Now, in the processing of step S31, the first left starting port sensor 4002a is in the ON state, and a game ball has entered the first left starting port 2002a, or the first right starting port sensor 4002b. Is in the ON state, and it is determined that a game ball has entered the first right starting port 2002b, as shown in FIG. 133, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 proceeds to step S41. First, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first reserved storage number is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 to set the variable display control of the first special symbol to a new suspended state. The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. And the process ends.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the first special symbol change display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S41. Is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing effect pre-judgment processing of judging pre-judgment information such as the type of the fluctuation pattern) before starting the fluctuation display according to the starting winning (step S45), the processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held.

  In addition, when the number of first reserved storages changes based on the game balls having entered the first starting port (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b), the first storing port number is changed in the storing process (step S20). A command (the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) indicating one reserved storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-described effect pre-judgment process (step S45). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-judgment processing, the pre-judgment table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation If a big hit is determined by comparing with a random number, the type of the big hit if the big hit is reached, and if not, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The type of the game effect to be performed is specified (step S61).

  Then, the specified preliminary determination information (whether or not a big hit is to be made, if a big hit is to be made, a type of big hit is to be made; Type of the game effect to be executed, etc.), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of storages to be stored (the value of the number of reservations counter) stored in correspondence with the obtained special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the (The value of one special reserved number counter) and the first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding to the value (step S62).

  Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the starting port (first left starting port 2002a, the first left starting port 2002a, in which the start winning is generated). One of the right starting port 2002b), whether the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the generated starting prize is a big hit, in addition to the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the starting port, and a big hit. If it is, the type of the big hit, if it does not become a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the advance determination information such as the type of the game effect to be executed is added to the start winning. The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before starting the corresponding variable display.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a first holding storage area for storing advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Further, the first reserved storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command in the first (earliest) storage. Store in order from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is received. When the first variation pattern command notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance variation stored in the first storage area of the first hold storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command is stored. The determination information is discarded, and the pre-determination information stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

  When the variable display control is set to the suspended state in this way, despite the fact that the variable display control is maintained in a non-executed state (reserved state), the big hit expectation degree of the variable display control (pseudo winning probability) ) Can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display corresponding to the hold exhaustion. .

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the second starting port passage processing (step S34).

  Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 135. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reserved stored number is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not "4" (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 to set the variable display control of the second special symbol to a new suspended state. The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process in step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. And the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S52 that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the above-mentioned variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  Further, when the second reserved storage number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, a command (second reserved number designation) indicating the second reserved storage number in the storage processing (step S20). Commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, Only the first special symbol processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag. It should be noted that there is no case where it is determined that a small hit has occurred as a result of comparison with the first special random number in the hit determination processing (step S105) described later. The hit determination process executed in the second special symbol process process may be a separate process, and in each process process in the first special symbol process process, control may be performed so as not to execute a process related to a small hit.

1. A first special symbol in which the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read first special random number is performed. Normal processing (step S80)
2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which a process of determining a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on a result of a lottery process on a display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol are described. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process is performed (step S82)
4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol display control 1403 displays the state of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 137, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S101. In the process of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the held state based on the counter value of the first special held number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is the variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process is then stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM as a process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Read from Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special reserved number stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), and the first starting port (first left starting port). 2002a, random numbers extracted in response to occurrence of a start winning prize in the first right starting opening 2002b) are sequentially stored from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become. Similarly, the second special symbol storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol storage area a to second special symbol storage area d). The extracted random numbers are stored sequentially from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the second special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  Then, thereafter, as a process of step S105, a hit determination process as a lottery process of the hit of the big hit or the small hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process is ended.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a hit determination table shown in FIG. 139 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special symbol normal process). (Step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 139 (A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and prepared for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one type of the first special random number matches the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with a loss determination value indicating loss (big hit probability: 1/300). In the present example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, one type of the second special random number is used. The second special random number is set so that 299 kinds of second special random numbers that match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won and are different from the big hit determination value match the small hit determination value that indicates that the big hit has been won. (Big hit probability; 1/300, small hit probability: 299/300). That is, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number is not determined to be a small hit, but is determined to be one of a big hit and a loss. In the hit determination table referred to for comparison, it is always determined that one of the big hit and the small hit is determined.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process). As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the hit is a big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the change is a big hit is set (step S116), and the hit judging process is ended.

  Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), If it is determined that the small hit has occurred (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change has won the small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if neither the big hit nor the small hit has been won, that is, if it is determined that a loss has occurred, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is in the time reduction state, and is used when the game state is in the non-time reduction state. A state determination table. In the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach is determined so that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach is possible, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that reach is not possible. Random numbers are associated with each other.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the non-hours reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that the reach number of five types including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time reduction state reaches the reach determination value, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that no reach is made. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach in the non-time reduction state is set higher than in the time reduction state.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119) and determines that a reach loss has occurred (step S120), the fluctuation is determined. The reach flag indicating the reach is set, and the process ends (step S121).

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 140, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU 1310a selects the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 139 (B), and matches the first symbol random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing the selected big hit symbol determination table with the selected big hit symbol determination table, a big hit symbol as a mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 139 (B), a symbol random number (a first symbol random number, a second symbol random number) is associated with the jackpot symbol determination table in accordance with the determination result (10R jackpot A, 10R jackpot B, 15R jackpot). It is remembered in the form. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In the big hit symbol determination table of this example, the setting probability of the type of big hit determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of big hit determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. are doing.

In particular,
1. The first large winning opening 2005 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first counting sensor 4005a detects that 9 game balls have been won in the first large winning opening 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern ten times, the game ball is controlled to a 10R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter (easily) the first big winning opening 2005, and is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state.
2. The first large winning opening 2005 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first counting sensor 4005a detects that 9 game balls have been won in the first large winning opening 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern ten times, the game ball is controlled to a 10R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy), and is controlled to a non-time saving state after the jackpot game state ends.
3. The first large winning opening 2005 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first counting sensor 4005a detects that 9 game balls have been won in the first large winning opening 2005. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times, the game ball is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy), and is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state.

  In the big hit symbol determination table, which is compared with the first symbol random number, 80 judgment values are sorted when a 10R big hit A is obtained, and 20 judgment values are sorted when a 10R big hit B is obtained. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, a 10R big hit A is obtained with a probability of 80% and a 10R big hit B is obtained with a probability of 20%. On the other hand, the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number indicates that all the 100 determination values are sorted in the case of a 15R jackpot, and that a lottery result of a jackpot is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number. Always have a 15R jackpot.

  When a lottery result for a big hit is obtained, a game state after the big hit game state is ended is determined according to the type of the big hit. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), after the big hit game state is controlled, a time saving flag setting process is executed based on the determination result.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the big hit of “10R big hit A” has been obtained, the time-saving state until the symbol change of the special symbol is executed once after the jackpot game state for 10 rounds is executed. When it is determined that the big hit of "10R big hit B" has been obtained, the big hit game state for 10 rounds is executed and then the non-time saving state is controlled, and the big hit of "15R big hit" is obtained. When it is determined that the symbol has been hit, the game is controlled to the time-saving state until the symbol change of the special symbol is executed once after the jackpot game state for 15 rounds is executed.

  In addition, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing, when it is determined to be 10R jackpot A, it is determined to be a 10R jackpot A symbol as a jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be 10R jackpot B, it is determined to be a 10R jackpot B symbol as a jackpot symbol. . In the case of determining a 15R jackpot in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 144 described later, the 15R jackpot symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines a lost symbol (step S136).

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the above-described lottery result (any one of the type of big hit, small hit, reach loss, and loss) as the process of step S137. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S138, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82), the process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration patterns are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decoration pattern → the right decoration pattern → the middle decoration). The symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the symbols (note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be synchronously displayed in the same symbol in a synchronized manner, and may be stopped and displayed simultaneously). Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the 10R jackpot A among the jackpots from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped (stop symbol). Is determined to be a 10R jackpot A symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol excluding [1] among the symbols [1] to [8]), and when the 10R jackpot B is specified. Is determined to be a 10R jackpot B symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol excluding [1] among the symbols [0] to [8]), and when the 15R jackpot is specified, It is determined to be a 15R big hit symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol excluding [1] among the symbols [0] to [8]). In addition, when a small hit is specified, a small hit symbol (combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all [1]; [111]) is determined, and when a reach loss is specified, a reach is accompanied. If a lost design is determined (a combination of the same design of the left and right decorative designs [0] to [8] and a different middle decorative design; reach reach design) and the loss is specified, Lost symbols without reach (combinations in which at least the left and right decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are different symbols) are determined, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (game effect At the time of the end), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag If it has been done (step S141), a large hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of big hit determined in step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal loss (reach effect) If the loss is not executed, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the loss (FIG. Not) to select (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148). The variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). Thus, the first special symbol display 1403 performs the variation display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be performed.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is included in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. The variable random numbers are stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a determines the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Are obtained, and the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random numbers is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine the type of the mode of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, out of 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are super reach having a low jackpot expectation degree. The determination values (164 to 222) are set as the determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is to be performed, and the determination values (223 to 240) indicating that the 18 types of variable random numbers execute any of the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation. ). In addition, the super-reach production is that the big hit expectation is higher than the normal reach production, and for the player who wants to generate the big hit game state, when the super reach production is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit game state is It is growing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), in the variation pattern table of this example, 10 seconds to 90 seconds are set as the variation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-time reduction state, and 120 seconds are set in the time reduction state. In addition, 2 seconds are commonly set as the fluctuation time corresponding to the second special random number in the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state.

  Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), the process ends.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol change process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol change process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S171. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the lottery variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, the process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S181. As the processing of the above, while performing display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command instructing to derive and display the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, when the time reduction flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time reduction flag (step S185). Thereby, when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed once, the time saving control is ended and the control in the non-time saving state is started.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game state is started (step S187), and the big hit game The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of the big hit to a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by one each time a round is executed in a jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified round number. Control to end the big hit gaming state. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the special winning opening opening process (step S91) and the special winning opening process (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the big hit counter reaches “0”, and the big winning is achieved. At the end of the round in the mouth opening process (step S92), the large hit counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "0", and the process proceeds to the special winning opening process (step S93) to change the big hit gaming state. Execute control to end.

  Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (10R jackpot A start command, 10R jackpot B start command, 15R jackpot start command) according to the type of jackpot (10R jackpot A, 10R jackpot B, 15R jackpot) is set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game state according to the type of the jackpot specified by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  The big hit executing flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is, when the big hit gaming state ends, specifically, in the post-big hit opening processing (step S93) of the big hit control processing (step S40). Opening / closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 according to the type of big hit (for example, in the case of “15R big hit”, after opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first big winning opening 2005 When the first count sensor 4005a detects that 9 game balls have been won, the opening / closing control for repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed 15 times is ended (all rounds that can be executed in the big hit game state). Reset. The big hit execution flag is reset so that the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is displayed. And the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 can be executed.

  When the big hit flag is not set, that is, when the game is lost, the process shifts to step S194 without executing the processes of steps S187 to S189.

  When the processes of steps S186 to S189 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is an initial value. (Step S 194), and this process ends.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

  In addition, as described above, the second special symbol process process is a program module substantially similar to the first special symbol process process, and except for a part of the process, the only difference is a random number and a table used for determination. Only processing different from the processing executed in the first special symbol processing processing will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the variable display stop of the second special symbol is not included as a result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, as a result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit is determined as a result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time. It is also determined whether or not it has become. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether the small hit flag is set.

  Specifically, if the big hit flag is not set (step S131a), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S133a). If the small hit flag is set, FIG. C) The small special symbol determination table shown in C) is selected, and the second special symbol variation table read out in the second special symbol normal processing (not shown) is compared with the selected small special symbol determination table to control the variation of the second special symbol. The small hit symbol as the mode at the time of stop (stop symbol of the second special symbol) is determined (step S134a).

  As shown in FIG. 139 (D), the symbol random number (second symbol random number) is associated with the small hit symbol determination table in accordance with the determination result (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C). It is remembered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the small hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired second symbol random number.

In particular,
1. The second large winning opening 2005b is closed after a long time opening (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second counting sensor 4005b detects that nine game balls have been won in the second large winning opening 2005b. The small hitting game state is controlled, and when the gaming ball received in the second big winning port 2005b is distributed to the V winning port 2411 during the small hitting gaming state, the first big winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, After 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first special winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated 14 times, so that the game balls are placed in the first big win port 2005. A small hit A which is controlled to a big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005 and is controlled to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends.
2. The second large winning opening 2005b is closed after a long time opening (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second counting sensor 4005b detects that nine game balls have been won in the second large winning opening 2005b. The small hitting game state is controlled, and when the gaming ball received in the second big winning port 2005b is distributed to the V winning port 2411 during the small hitting gaming state, the first big winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, After 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first special winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated nine times, so that the game ball can be placed in the first place. A small hit B in which a big hit game 2005 is controlled to a big hit game state in which it is possible to enter a ball (easy), and the big hit game state is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the big hit game state.
3. The second large winning opening 2005b is closed after a long time opening (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second counting sensor 4005b detects that nine game balls have been won in the second large winning opening 2005b. The small hitting game state is controlled, and when the gaming ball received in the second big winning port 2005b is distributed to the V winning port 2411 during the small hitting gaming state, the first big winning port 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, After 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first special winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated four times, so that the game balls can be placed in the first game place. A small hit C which is controlled to a big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big hit hole 2005 and to control to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends.

  The small hit symbol determination table, which is compared with the second symbol random number, is such that when the hit is small A, ten judgment values are assigned, and when the small hit B is reached, 20 judgment values are assigned. When the hit C is reached, 70 judgment values are sorted. That is, when the lottery result of the small hit is obtained by the lottery based on the second special random number, the small hit is A with a probability of 10%, the small hit B with a probability of 20%, and the small hit with a probability of 70%. B.

  In addition, when the lottery result of the small hit is obtained, the game ball received in the second big winning opening 2005b during the small hitting game state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 according to the kind of the small hit. The game state after the end of the generated big hit game state is determined. In the big hit control process (step S40), the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the fact that the game ball received in the second big winning port 2005b is distributed to the V winning port 2411 during the small hit gaming state. Thereafter, the processing for setting the time reduction flag is executed based on the determination result.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the small hit of “small hit A” is obtained, the time reduction is performed until the symbol change of the special symbol is executed once after the big hit game state for 15 rounds is executed. When the state is controlled and it is determined that the small hit of "small hit B" is obtained, the time reduction is performed until the symbol change of the special symbol is executed once after the big hit game state for 10 rounds is executed. When the state is controlled and it is determined that the small hit of "small hit C" is obtained, the time reduction is performed until the symbol change of the special symbol is executed once after the big hit game state for five rounds is executed. State controlled.

  In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the small hit A is determined, the small hit A symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the small hit B is determined, the small hit symbol is changed to the small hit B symbol. It is determined, and when it is determined to be the small hit C, the small hit C symbol is determined as the small hit symbol.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second variation pattern setting process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

  When the big hit flag is not set in the second variation pattern setting process (step S141a), and the small hit flag is set (step S143a), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 generates a small hit. A change pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S144a).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S148a), and the start of the determined variation pattern is determined by the peripheral control board 1510. Is set, and the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 is started (step S149a). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150a). As a result, the second special symbol display control is performed on the second special symbol display 1405 for the thus determined variable time, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. Will be performed.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol stop process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates that when the big hit flag is not set (step S186a) and the small hit flag is set (step S190a), the small hitting game state is started. A small hitting start command is set (step S191a), and a standby time until the start of the small hitting gaming state (a time for displaying the start of the small hitting gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S192a). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S193a). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the small hit type. In step S191a, a small hit start command (small hit A start command, small hit B start command, small hit C start command) according to the small hit type (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C) is set. . Thereby, the effect of the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hit specified by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  When the small hitting game state is ended, the small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game state is being executed is specifically set in the small hitting control process (step S41) described later. In step S401), after opening / closing control of the second special winning opening 2005b according to the type of the small hit (for example, in the case of "small hit C", after opening the second special winning opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or This is reset when the opening / closing control for closing the game when the second count sensor 4005b detects that nine game balls have won the second large winning opening 2005b. The small hitting execution flag is reset so that the small hitting control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14). It becomes a state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 can be executed.

  If the small hit flag is not set, that is, if a loss occurs, the process shifts to step S194a without executing the processes of steps S190a to S193a.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the big hit control process (step S40). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The peripheral control board informs the player of the transition to the big hit game state based on the change of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) at the time of the change display stop to the big hit symbol. Preliminary opening process of the special winning opening to wait until performed by 1510 or to start the next round (step S91)
2. The first special winning opening 2005 is controlled to be in an open state based on the state of the special symbol when the variable display is stopped becomes the big hit symbol, or the first special winning opening 2005 is controlled based on the start of the next round. Is controlled to be in the open state, and after the first big winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the first count sensor 4005a is used. Opening the special winning opening to close when detected (step S92)
3. When the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit game state is finished when all rounds are finished, the processing after opening the big winning opening (step S93).
The big hit process flag is operated to indicate that the big win opening processing (step S91) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. Small hit start processing for executing setting processing for starting the small hit game state (step S400)
2. Small hit processing during monitoring of the entry and release time of the game ball in the small hit game state (step S401)

  The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit start process (step S400).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer indicating the waiting time until the start of the small hitting game state as the process of step S411, and if the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S412). ) The process ends without executing the subsequent processes. Note that the interval timer is set based on the fact that the small hit flag is set when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped as described above (second special symbol stop processing).

  On the other hand, if the interval timer has timed out (YES in step S412), the opening time of the second special winning opening 2005b is set in the opening timer (step S413), and after the small hit opening effect command is set (step S413). (S415), the second special winning opening 2005b is controlled to the open state (step S416).

  Thereafter, when the small hitting process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the small hitting middle process (step S401) (step S417), this process ends.

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hitting process (step S401).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not the number of game balls accepted into the second big winning opening 2005b by the second count sensor 4005b in the process of step S421 reaches “9”. Is determined, and when the number of game balls accepted into the second big winning opening 2005b reaches “9”, the process proceeds to step S427.

  If the number of game balls accepted into the second special winning opening 2005b in step S421 does not reach “9”, the second special winning opening 2005b is controlled to be in an open state and then controlled to be in a closed state. The open timer indicating the open time up to 1 is decremented by 1 (step S425), it is determined whether or not the open timer has timed out (step S426), and if not, the subsequent processing is performed (NO in step S426). The process is terminated without executing, and if a timeout has occurred (YES in step S426), the flow advances to step S427.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the small hitting execution flag (step S427), and controls the second big winning opening 2005b in the open state to the closed state (step S428).

  At this time, if a game ball has entered the V winning opening 2411 (step S429), a 1R end command indicating that one round of the big hit game state is ended is set (step S430), and the big hit game state is started. Is set in the interval timer (step S431), and then the big hit execution flag and the bonus hit flag indicating that the big hit game state has been established based on the V winning during the small hit game state are set. (Step S432). The bonus winning flag is used to determine whether the big hit game state has been reached or the big hit symbol has been stopped and the big hit game state has been reached based on the V winning during the small hit game state in the big hit control process (step S40). If the bonus winning flag is set, it is notified as if the second round of the 15R jackpot gaming state, which is executed over 15 rounds when the 15R jackpot gaming state is executed, is being executed. The player will recognize that the 15R big hit game state is being executed including the small hit game state.

  Although not shown, in step S431, the number of unexecuted rounds (the number of remaining rounds when the small hitting game state is set to one round (for example, the V winning opening 2411) In the case of the small hit A which is controlled to the 15R big hit gaming state based on the entry of the game ball, the small hit A is set to 14) as the number of remaining rounds in the hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. As described above, the jackpot number counter is decremented by one each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process. When the jackpot number counter becomes “0”, the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 determines the specified round number. Is executed, and the big hit game state is ended.

  When the process in step S432 is completed and when it is determined in step S429 that there is no V winning, when the small hit process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the small hit start process (step S400) (step S400) S417), this process ends.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol process (step S15).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, the main signal is output as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 executes a gate passage process such as acquiring the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S802. I do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read ordinary random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped is performed (step S803).
2. Ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process that stands by until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display is stopped (step S805).
4. The normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed such that the normal symbol fluctuation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode in which the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped becomes a mode suggesting "per day", a process for controlling the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is executed. Normal electric accessory release processing (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

  FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passing process (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains, from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, as a process of step S811, a counter value of a normal reserved number counter indicating the number of ordinary random numbers stored in the ordinary symbol reserved storage area. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of stored ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  If it is determined in step S811 that the number of stored ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to newly set the variable display control of the ordinary symbols to a suspended state. Is performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the ordinary reservation number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the processing of step S813, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, as a process of step S814, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the ordinary holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, if it is determined in the processing of step S811 that the number of stored ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of step S812 to step S814 (the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number are not acquired from the random number counter), the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is not newly held.

  It should be noted that the gate portion passage processing (step S802) may be performed as another example described below. For example, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly executes The random number and the general variable fluctuating random number are obtained from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value of the ordinary reserve number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the retained number of ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4”. Do. If it is determined that the number of stored ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the ordinary reserved number counter is counted up (addition of 1) so that the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is newly held. Then, the previously-obtained ordinary random number and the general-purpose variable random number (the ordinary random number and the general-purpose variable random number stored in the provisional storage area) are stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value of the above normal hold number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value of the ordinary reserve number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, when it is determined that this counter value is the maximum value “4” (the reserved storage number of the ordinary symbol is In the case of the maximum value), the previously acquired ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number are discarded without being stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area, and the acquired ordinary symbol change display control is newly performed. It may be configured not to be suspended.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes whether or not the display result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is a per-genuine figure based on the ordinary random number and the ordinary variable random number acquired in step S813. Performs a prior art predetermination process of determining prior determination information such as a pattern variation mode type (common symbol variation pattern type) before starting a normal symbol variation according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. After that (step S815), the process ends.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the general-purpose figure pre-determination processing (step S815). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the general figure pre-determination processing, the main control MPU 1310a compares the general figure pre-determination table (not shown) with the random number acquired in step S813, specifically, the normal random number and the normal variable random number. Then, it is determined whether or not to win the ordinary figure, and in the case of the ordinary figure, the type of the ordinary figure and the type of normal symbol variation to be executed are specified (step S881).

  Then, the specified general symbol pre-determination information (whether or not the general symbol is hit, if the normal symbol is hit, the type of the normal symbol, the type of the normal symbol variation to be executed, etc.) and the normal symbol hold storage Set the general figure prior judgment command according to the number (the value of the ordinary reservation number counter).

  Then, in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol command control process (step S17), the ordinary symbol pre-judgment command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that in addition to the number of ordinary symbols held and stored, the generated gate section 2003 Whether or not the display result of the normal symbol change display based on the passing of the game ball is a normal symbol hit, and if it is a normal symbol hit, the type of the normal symbol change, the type of normal symbol change mode to be executed, etc. The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the figure preliminary determination information before starting the ordinary symbol change according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the general-purpose pre-judgment command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the general-purpose pre-judgment information indicated by the received general-purpose pre-judgment command. I have. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a general-purpose reservation storage area for storing general-purpose prior determination information.

  Also, the general-purpose reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the general-purpose preliminary determination information indicated by the received general-purpose preliminary determination command as the first (most). The storage areas are stored in order from the first storage area. Then, when the universal figure pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the universal figure pre-judgment command is received and notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the general pattern changing pattern command for notifying the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is received, the general pattern pre-determination information is stored in the first storage area of the general figure holding storage area according to the received general pattern changing pattern command. The pre-determination information stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is discarded, and the N-1 (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area is stored. (Shifting the figure pre-judgment information stored in the figure storage area). As a result, the ordinary symbol pre-judgment information of the ordinary symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the ordinary symbol change has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest ordinary symbol pre-judgment information.

  At the time when the ordinary symbol change is put into the suspended state in this way, the ordinary symbol variation is maintained in an unexecuted state (reserved state). The winning probability can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion. become. Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a general figure pre-judgment command indicating that the result of the lottery process (normal judgment) for a normal symbol is a normal hit during the chance mode, an effect indicating that it is a normal hit Is performed, and if it is determined that an effect suggesting a normal hit is to be performed as a result of the lottery, a general-purpose reservation display area 1609 corresponding to the general-purpose preliminary determination command (FIG. 165) ) Is changed to a special mode different from the normal mode and displayed. In the present example, a circle painted in blue is displayed as a normal display mode of the ordinary figure suspension display area 1609, and a circle painted in red is displayed as a special mode different from the normal mode. Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not actually make a normal hit even if it receives a general figure pre-judgment command indicating that the result of the lottery process (normal judgment) for the normal symbol is a normal loss during the chance mode. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform an effect that indicates a hit, and if it is determined that an effect that indicates a normal hit is to be executed as a result of the lottery, The display mode of the figure suspension display area 1609 is changed to a special mode and displayed. However, when a general drawing pre-judgment command indicating that the result of the lottery process (ordinary determination) for the ordinary symbol is an ordinary loss is received, the result of the lottery process (ordinary determination) for the ordinary symbol is an ordinary hit. The ratio determined to execute the effect suggesting that it is a normal hit is lower than when the general-purpose pre-judgment command indicating that the general-purpose pre-judgment command is received, so that a special mode is displayed in the general-purpose display display area 1609. If this is done, it is possible to improve the expectation of the occurrence of a normal hit, and thus a big hit of the second special symbol.

  In addition, the effect that suggests that it is a normal hit is not limited to the above-described one, and a special sound (for example, pico cone, etc.) is output based on the reception of the general-purpose pre-judgment command, and the effect (the normal hit is a normal hit). If no effect is suggested, no sound may be output, or a sound (picot or the like) different from a special sound may be output), the door frame 3 or the game board 5. The lamps and LEDs provided in a special light emission pattern (when the effect indicating that it is a normal hit is not performed, the lamps and the LED etc. are not turned on, while the normal hit is suggested. When performing an effect that does not perform, a lamp or LED is blinked a plurality of times in a short time, etc., or a special luminescent color (when not performing an effect indicating that it is a normal hit, a lamp or an LED is used). Is turned on in blue, while when an effect that suggests a normal hit is executed, a lamp or LED is turned on in red, etc. Alternatively, an effect indicating that the player is a normal hit may be executed by executing a plurality of these in combination.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 154, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly performs the process of step S821 as follows. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value of the ordinary suspended number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state, then as a process of step S822, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is processed. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, ordinary figure variable random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal count number counter is counted down, and when the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Are shifted in a first-in first-out manner (first-in first-out).

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003 are sequentially arranged from the first (earliest) area. Remember. When the random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols is suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is sequentially released from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the ordinary figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 155 (A) with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

  155 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, in the ordinary figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, one kind of ordinary random number matches the universal figure hit determination value indicating that the ordinary figure has won, and 19 kinds of ordinary random numbers are used. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match a general figure loss determination value indicating that the figure is lost.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process, and determines that it is the ordinary symbol hit (step S829), A general symbol perception flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per ordinary symbol is set (step S830), and a symbol per ordinary symbol is determined as a mode (normal symbol stopped symbol) when the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that it is not a normal symbol hit, a normal symbol loss symbol is determined as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S833).

  Then, after the lottery process for the ordinary symbol is performed, as a process of step S834, the lottery result (indicating one of the per-drawing and the loss) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by the lottery. A general-purpose diagram determination result notification command corresponding to each result is set. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S835, when the above-described ordinary symbol process flag is updated so as to proceed to the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804), this process is ended.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 156, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the time reduction flag. 157 (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the time reduction shown in FIG. 157 is selected (step S842). If the time reduction flag is set (step S841), the non-time reduction normal pattern shown in FIG. A symbol variation pattern determination table is selected (step S843).

  Then, by comparing the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table with the ordinary symbol variation random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process, a variation pattern (ordinary symbol variation pattern) of the ordinary symbol to be executed is determined (step S844). ), The general symbol variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the ordinary symbol variation in the determined ordinary symbol variation pattern is set, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is started ( Step S845). The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 includes the general symbol determination result notification command set in step S834 of the ordinary symbol normal process and the ordinary symbol variation pattern command set in step S845 of the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process. , The fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to the stop of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol (the stop symbol of the normal symbol) are specified and produced. The display change of the ordinary symbol is started on the display device 1600, and the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol identified from the ordinary symbol determination result notification command is produced and displayed when the variation time of the ordinary symbol specified by the ordinary symbol variation pattern command elapses. It is displayed on the device 1600.

  Further, when determining the general-purpose variation pattern, the main control MPU 1310a sets the general-purpose variation time corresponding to the determined general-purpose variation pattern in the general-purpose variation timer (step S846). As a result, the effect control is performed by the ordinary symbol display 1402 (indicating the variation of the ordinary symbol) and the effect display device 1600 (indicating the variation of the decorative ordinary symbol) by the ordinary symbol variation time corresponding to the determined ordinary symbol variation pattern. Will be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the present example, there are provided a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for a time reduction and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for a non-time reduction. Then, in the non-working time ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table, the distribution of the judgment values is set to be different from that in the time reduction ordinary figure variation time determination table, so that the ordinary symbol variation time of the ordinary symbol is different. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 157, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the time reduction is determined for the time reduction loss variation pattern set to 2 seconds as the general symbol variation time when the normal symbol is lost. While the distribution of the values is set, the non-working time normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table contains the non-working time loss fluctuation pattern 1 set to 4 seconds as the normal figure fluctuation time when the normal symbol is lost. The determination value is assigned to the non-working time loss variation pattern 2 set to 5 seconds. That is, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the time reduction is set so that the variation time of the normal symbol is extremely short as compared with the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time reduction. The ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the normal symbol variation display control is started, next, as the process of step S847, when the above-described ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-described ordinary symbol variation process (step S805), this process is started. The process ends.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol variation process (step S805). When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol variation processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 158, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly performs the processing in step S851 as follows. In the above step S846, the general figure fluctuation timer in which the general figure fluctuation time is set is decremented by one. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary figure variation time timer is 0, that is, that the variation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed (step S852), the following steps S853 to S856 are performed.

  That is, first, in the process of step S853, display control for displaying the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol determined in the ordinary symbol ordinary process on the ordinary symbol display device 1402 is performed, and the normal symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A general symbol stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative ordinary symbol according to the symbol stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S854). Also, in step S853, a predetermined general symbol fixing time (in this example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the general symbol stop timer 1 as a time for maintaining the stop symbol of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol indicator 1402. (Step S855). As a result, after stopping the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402, control for displaying the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 for a predetermined ordinary symbol fixed time is performed. Then, in the process of step S856, when the above-described ordinary symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the above-described ordinary symbol stop process (step S806), this process is ended.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol stop processing (step S806). When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 159, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly performs the processing in step S861 as follows: In step S855 of the ordinary symbol variation process, the ordinary symbol stop timer for setting a predetermined ordinary symbol fixed time is decremented by one. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol stop timer is 0, that is, the predetermined ordinary symbol fixed time has elapsed (step S862), the display control of the ordinary symbol stop symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is controlled. Is completed, and a general figure determination command instructing a final display of the display result of the decorative normal pattern corresponding to the stop symbol of the normal pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. (Step S863).

  Next, when the general figure hit flag is set (step S864), the second starting port corresponding to the current game state is used using the general figure open pattern table shown in FIG. 155 (B). An advance / retreat pattern of the door 2022 is set (step S865).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), if the non-time saving state is controlled at the start of opening of the second starting door 2022, the forward / backward pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting door 2022. I do. That is, if the non-time saving state is controlled at the start of the forward / backward movement of the second starting door 2022, the second starting door 2022 is shorted when the lottery result based on the ordinary drawing is obtained by the lottery based on the ordinary random number. An advancing / retreating pattern A that performs an advancing / retreating operation in an advancing / retreating mode (0.2 seconds in this example) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the current game state is controlled to the time-saving state at the time of starting the advance / retreat operation of the second start door 2022, the advance / retreat pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second start door 2022. That is, if the time saving state is controlled at the start of the forward / backward movement of the second start-up door 2022, the second start-up door 2022 is moved forward and backward when the lottery result based on the ordinary random number is obtained by the lottery based on the ordinary random number. The forward / backward pattern B in which the forward / backward operation is performed in the mode (6 seconds in this example) is executed.

  When the advancing / retreating pattern of the second starting door 2022 is set, next, as a process of step S886, a general symbol start command indicating to start a general symbol game is set, and the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal motor combination. When the process is updated so as to shift to the object release process (step S867), the process ends. Here, the per-figure start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the per-figure per game corresponding to the type of per-figure per designated by the per-figure start command is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This is executed by a lamp, LED, speaker, and the like.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the ordinary symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the ordinary symbol normal process which is the initial value when the ordinary symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807).

  Now, in the process of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting port door 2022 is in the protruding state and the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the main control is performed as shown in FIG. When a predetermined time (opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the advancing / retreating pattern set in step S865) has elapsed since the start of the opening state of the second starting port 2004, the main control MPU 1310a of the substrate 1310 (step S872) When the second starting port 2022 is retracted and the opened second starting port 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873), this processing is ended.

  In the process of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting port door 2022 is in the retracted state and the second starting port 2004 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control The main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, when it is time to open the second start-up door 2022 (step S874), advances the second start-up door 2022 to close the second start-up door 2022. When this is controlled to the open state (step S875), this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of step S871 that it is not the timing to open the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 When the number of times the start port 2004 is opened reaches a predetermined number (the number of times the second start port door 2022 opens and retreats in the advancing / retreating pattern set in step S865) (step S876), an end command per ordinary figure is set (step S877). ). Then, when the ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the ordinary symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S878), the process ends. In addition, the end command per ordinary figure is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and upon receiving the end command per ordinary figure at the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display game 1600, the effect of the game per ordinary figure executed by the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like. To end.

[10. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 161, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an interrupt every time 2 mS elapses, and executes a 2 mS regular process. In the 2 mS steady processing, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when the 16 mS has elapsed, the 16 mS elapsed time has elapsed. At the same time as setting the flag T, a process of resetting (clearing) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter to 0 is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapse flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 mS elapse flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapse flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapse flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady processing is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS regular process, a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, lamps / LEDs, speakers, and the like is executed based on a command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16mS. On the other hand, if the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the 16 mS regular processing executed every 16 mS in the sub main processing. In the 16 mS regular processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processing of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the effect is performed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process). The control processing related to the display device 1600 is executed.

  In the sound control process of step S603, a control process related to a speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 4170 is performed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS regular processing ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process to the end of the 16 mS steady-state process, the 16 mS steady-state process is started immediately after the 16 mS elapses from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process (the command in step S601). Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 mS has elapsed during the execution of the 16 mS steady processing, only the 16 mS elapsed flag is set. When it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapsed flag has been set after the end of the 16 mS steady processing, the 16 mS steady processing is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS regular process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 mS regular processing in the sub-main processing.

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (Step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. A variation pattern command that indicates a variation pattern of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed in the command analysis process (a first variation pattern command that indicates a variation pattern of the first special symbol, a second variation pattern command) After performing a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like based on the second change pattern command instructing the change pattern of the special symbol, the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the process during the variable effect. Effect start processing to change to (step S711)
2. The elapsed time from the start of the control of the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like is measured, and processing for controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like is performed according to the elapsed time, and the special symbol ( Variation effect processing process (step S712) in which the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variation end process when the variation time according to the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has elapsed.
3. A process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result is performed based on receiving a stop display command instructing a variable display stop of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Change the process flag to a value according to the variable production start process, change the value to a value according to the big hit production process if it is a big hit, and change it to a value according to the small hit production process if it is a small hit (Step S713)
4. Based on the reception of the big hit start command instructing the start of the big hit gaming state, the effect display device 1600 performs a process for executing the display control during the big hit gaming state, and when the big hit gaming state ends, the above-described rendering process Big hit production process of changing the flag to a value according to the variable production start process (step S714)
5. Based on the reception of the small hitting start command instructing the start of the small hitting gaming state, the effect display device 1600 performs a process for performing the display control during the small hitting gaming state, and performs the second processing during the small hitting gaming state. If the gaming ball received in the big winning opening 2005b is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, when the small hitting game state is ended, the effect process flag is changed to a value according to the big hit effect start processing, If it is not sorted to the V winning opening 2411, the small hit effect process is changed to a value according to the variable effect start process (step S715).

  By the above process, the special symbol display (first special symbol display 1403, second special symbol display 1405) is performed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed. The display of the decoration symbol is changed on the display device 1600.

[11. Games in Chance Mode and Winning Time]
In the present embodiment, a game is started in the normal mode, a big win is won in the normal mode, and a time-saving state occurs after the big hit game state, so that the game shifts to a chance mode which is a state more advantageous than the normal mode, The game shifts to the winning right exercising time due to the occurrence of the second hold memory during the game. The game in such a chance mode and the winning right exercising time will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the normal mode (non-time saving state) and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the first big winning opening 2005 is set as each round game in the big hit gaming state. In the open state (evacuated state), the game balls must be driven one after another on the right side of the center role 2500 in order to allow a large amount of game balls to enter the first big winning opening 2005 in the open state. As described above, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the center role 2500, about 2/100 of the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 always move forward and backward. Into the inside of the constantly driven door 2021, and a prize of a game ball to the first right starting port 2002b is generated. For this reason, during the big hit game state, one or more game balls win with a high probability in the first right starting opening 2002b, and are held as the first held storage number which is the stored number of hit determination on the first special symbol side. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, during the big hit game state, since the time saving state is not controlled (the non-time saving state is controlled), it is temporarily determined whether the game ball is hit based on the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 (ordinary determination). As a result, even if the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed and the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 moves forward and backward, the advancing and retreating mode is such that the game ball is hardly accepted to the second starting port 2004. In this mode, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs. Thus, in the normal mode (non-time saving state), when the first special symbol is variably displayed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, in most cases, the first special symbol is first displayed after the big hit game state. Is fluctuated.

  Next, when the 10R big hit A symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol, the time saving state is controlled after the big hit game state ends. At this time, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the variation time of the first special symbol is longer than the normal variation time (120 seconds in this example) regardless of the result of the hit determination. Is displayed. Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed with the long fluctuating time, a game aiming at passing the game ball to the gate unit 2003 is performed.

  When a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 during the above-described chance mode, a determination is made as to whether or not the game is a normal symbol hit (normal determination), and a normal symbol is variably displayed based on the determination result. At this time, in the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display is performed in any one of 2 to 21 seconds which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set as the general symbol fluctuation pattern. In other words, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with a long variance time (120 seconds in this example), it is possible to perform the normal determination up to about 60 times.

  In addition, when the stop pattern of the ordinary symbol in the chance mode described above is the symbol per ordinary symbol, it is controlled to the protruding state for 6 seconds as the opening time of the second starting door 2022 in the time saving state. The game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the second reserved storage number, which is the number of hit determinations on the second special symbol side, increases, and the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. Will be done.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, one of the big hit and the small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit judgment on the second special symbol side. In the case of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, if a small hit is obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, it is determined that even one ball is accepted in the second big winning opening 2005b during the small hit game state. One ball is always assigned to the V winning port 2411. In this example, if the right hit is continued during the small hitting game state, at least one ball is controlled in the second big winning opening 2005b so as to receive a game ball. In other words, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol side hit determination, a large hit is almost always obtained. Therefore, it is practically a small hit as a result of the second special symbol side hit determination. It can be said that the right to win a big hit (winning right) is obtained.

  During the chance mode of the present example, a case is shown in which a normal symbol is stopped and displayed twice as a symbol per ordinary symbol. In such a case, when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door 2022 is in the protruding state, the second special symbol side hit determination memory number is stored. The number of reserved storages increases by two, and the right to become a big hit (winning right) is acquired twice. In addition, during the chance mode of this example, in addition to the fact that the normal judgment is performed about 20 to 40 times, the probability that the result of the normal judgment becomes a symbol per ordinary symbol is set to 1/20. On average, the number of second reserved storages is increased by one or two, and the right to be a big hit (winning right) can be acquired once or twice.

  Next, when the loss design is stopped as a symbol mode according to the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol when the long variation time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the state shifts to the non-time saving state. At the same time, the process moves to the winning right exercising time based on the fact that there are two second reserved memory numbers. In the case of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when there is the second reserved storage number, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in preference to the first special symbol. Regardless of whether or not there is, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the second hold storage. At this time, in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the fluctuation display is performed in 2 seconds which is the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the non-time saving state.

  During the winning right exercising time of the present example, a case where the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol is shown. In such a case, the small hitting game state is executed so that the second large winning opening 2005b can be received by the game ball, and the gaming ball that has won the second large winning opening 2005b is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. The jackpot game state is executed on condition that the game has been performed, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened (evacuated) as each round game in the jackpot game state.

  In addition, when the gaming ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hitting game state executed based on the second special symbol being the small hitting symbol, the time saving state is always set after the big hitting game state ends. Control. In addition, after the end of the first big hit gaming state in the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol is fluctuated based on the second second hold memory. At this time, in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display is performed in 2 seconds which is the variation time of the second special symbol in the time saving state, as in the non-time saving state. When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol, the small hit game state is executed to make the second large winning opening 2005b a state in which the game ball can be accepted, and the second large winning opening 2005b is set. On the condition that the game ball which has won the prize is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, the second big hit game state in the winning right exercising time is executed.

  After the end of the second big hit gaming state in the winning right exercising time, the time saving state is continued and the mode shifts again to the chance mode. In other words, as long as the normal determination is won during the chance mode, it is possible to continue the advantageous state for the player who loops between the winning right time and the chance mode.

[12. Display contents of the effect display device]
FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing display contents of the effect display device 1600 in the chance mode. During the normal mode, the decorative design 1605 (left decorative design 1605a, middle decorative design 1605b, right decorative design 1605c) composed of three columns of left, middle and right is enlarged and displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600, and the first special design is displayed. The variable display is synchronized with the variable display. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, in the chance mode, as in the normal mode, a decorative pattern 1605 composed of three columns of left, middle, and right is enlarged and displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600. The decorative symbol 1605 is not variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed first special symbol, but is variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed normal symbol.

  In the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600, a first special figure corresponding decorative display area 1606 for changing and displaying the first special figure corresponding decorative pattern corresponding to the changing display of the first special symbol, and a change of the second special symbol are displayed. A second special figure corresponding decorative display area 1607 for variably displaying the second special figure corresponding decorative pattern corresponding to the display is provided. The first special figure corresponding decorative display area 1606 and the second special figure corresponding decorative display area 1607 are also displayed during the normal mode, and are displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600 during the normal mode. Even when a character or the like is displayed in place of a decorative pattern that is present, or when a decorative pattern displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600 during the chance mode is synchronized with a variable display of a normal symbol, The state of the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol can be confirmed.

  In addition, in the lower right part of the effect display device 1600, there is provided a general figure corresponding decorative display area 1608 for displaying a general figure corresponding decorative pattern in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of a normal symbol. The normal figure corresponding decorative display area 1608 is also displayed during the normal mode like the first special figure corresponding decorative display area 1606 and the second special figure corresponding decorative display area 1607. When the decorative symbol displayed in the center is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, or in the chance mode, a character or the like is displayed instead of the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. Even in this case, it is possible to confirm the state of the variable display of the ordinary symbols.

  In addition, at the left end of the effect display device 1600, there are provided ordinary symbol reserved display areas 1609a to 1609d for displaying the reserved number of ordinary symbols corresponding to ordinary random numbers stored in the ordinary symbol reserved storage area. At the right end of 1600, there are provided second special figure reserved display areas 1610a to 1610d for displaying the second reserved stored number corresponding to the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area. Note that, as described above, the state in which the second reserved memory number is present is a state in which the right to win a big hit (winning right) is obtained, so that a game ball is accepted to the second starting port 2004 during the chance mode. And the number of the second reserved storages are indicated by a star mark, so that it is possible to recognize that a special reservation has occurred.

  In the chance mode, a timer display area 1611 for displaying the remaining time in the chance mode is displayed below the effect display device 1600. As described above, the chance mode is controlled over a period in which the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed with a long fluctuation time (120 seconds). During this period, the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003. The game aiming at the per-map drawing is performed. In the timer display area 1611, the remaining time is displayed in a countdown manner, and the player is conscious of the remaining time of the chance mode displayed in the timer display area 1611 and aims for the occurrence of the ordinary figure, thereby causing impatience and anxiety. The player can hold the game and play the game in a throbbing state, and can give a sense of accomplishment or satisfaction when the game ball is accepted to the second starting port 2004 due to the occurrence of a perpetual figure. Is improved.

  In the chance mode, a mode information display area 1612 is displayed at the upper right of the effect display device 1600. The mode information display area 1612 is for notifying the player that the player is in the chance mode and that the player makes a right-hand shot, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

[13. Production during the chance mode]
In the present embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, the big win is won during the normal mode, and the time-saving state is generated after the big hit game state, so that the game shifts to the chance mode, which is a state more advantageous than the normal mode. An effect using the effect display device 1600 in such a chance mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, during the chance mode, when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a determination is made as to whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (ordinary determination), and an effect is generated in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol based on the determination result. On the display device 1600, the decorative symbols are changed and displayed. Then, when the stop pattern of the ordinary symbol is the symbol per ordinary symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is also displayed as a hit symbol, and the ball can enter the second starting port 2004. At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second reserved storage number, which is the storage number of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, increases.

  Next, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with the long fluctuation time (120 seconds in this example), the remaining 10 seconds before the long fluctuation time elapses (the fluctuation of the first special symbol). At the stage of 110 seconds after the display is started), it is determined whether or not there is a second reserved storage number which is a storage number of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. Then, if there is a second reserved memory number at the stage of the remaining 10 seconds, the effect of whether or not the stop mode of the decorative symbol hits the symbol is continued as it is, and after the elapse of the long fluctuation time, the second symbol is retained. The process moves to the winning right exercising time based on the presence of two pending memories.

  On the other hand, in the stage of the remaining 10 seconds before the elapse of the long fluctuation time, when there is no second hold storage number, as the effect using the effect display device 1600, the decorative pattern stop mode is hit. In place of the effect of whether or not to become a symbol, an effect of whether or not the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped with the big hit symbol is executed. Specifically, an effect (last battle effect) is developed in a battle format as an effect as to whether or not the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped at the big hit symbol.

  Next, when the first special symbol in the fluctuation display is stopped at the big hit symbol, the battle in the last battle effect is won after the long fluctuation time elapses, and thereafter, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol stops at the big hit symbol. The jackpot game state is executed based on the result.

  On the other hand, if the first special symbol in the fluctuation display is stopped with a lost symbol, the battle in the last battle effect is defeated when the long fluctuation time has elapsed, and the last battle effect is being executed (the long fluctuation time has elapsed). It is determined whether or not the number of second pending storages has increased during the remaining 10 seconds before the execution. That is, at the stage of the remaining 10 seconds, which is before the elapse of the long fluctuation time, the second reserved storage number does not exist. It is determined whether or not there is.

  Then, at the stage of the remaining 10 seconds before the long fluctuation time elapses, there is no second reserved storage number, but when there is the second reserved storage number at the time when the long fluctuation time elapses, The game is reversed from the defeat of the battle in the last battle effect, and a resurrection effect to win the battle is executed, and thereafter, the process shifts to the winning right exercising time based on the presence of the second reserved memory number. In addition, when performing the resurrection effect, from the time when the long fluctuation time has elapsed (at the time when the battle in the last battle effect has been lost), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol started based on the second hold memory thereafter. , During the period until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the resurrection effect is executed. On the other hand, at the stage of the remaining 10 seconds before the elapse of the long fluctuation time, if there is no second pending storage number and there is no second pending storage number even at the time when the long fluctuation time has elapsed, The defeat of the battle in the last battle effect will not be overturned, and thereafter, the mode shifts to the normal mode (non-time saving state) based on the absence of the second reserved memory number.

[14. Chance mode and secrecy of second hold memory during winning time]
In the present embodiment, a game is started in the normal mode, a big win is won in the normal mode, and a time-saving state occurs after the big hit game state, so that the game shifts to a chance mode which is a state more advantageous than the normal mode, When the second hold storage occurs during the second hold storage, when the second hold storage occurs, the fact is notified when the second hold storage occurs. Is not notified to that effect, but is notified after the occurrence of the second pending storage.

  First, the case where the secrecy condition is satisfied when the second hold memory is generated is when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 during the small hit game state or the big hit game state during the winning right exercising time. Is mentioned. In addition, at the end of the big hit gaming state at the time of winning right exercise time, the normal symbol fluctuation display is started, and after the big hit gaming state is completed, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol per ordinary symbol, and the second starting port is displayed. A case in which the ball 2004 enters a ball-enterable state, and a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 in the ball-enterable state. Further, in the state in which the second starting port 2004 can enter the ball in the chance mode, the second starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2004 are opened in the single entering state (one opening of the second starting port 2004). Is entered. Also, there is a case where a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 just before the end of the chance mode (for example, less than 10 seconds and the above-described last battle effect is being executed).

  Then, when the above-described concealment condition is satisfied and the occurrence of the second hold storage is concealed, it is notified that the second hold storage has already occurred at a predetermined timing. One example is a battle victory in the last battle effect described above. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, during execution of the big hit gaming state during the winning right exercising time. In this example, during the execution of the big hit gaming state, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600. For example, in the fourth round, is the occurrence of the second hold storage concealed? A button effect for notifying the user may be executed. In such a button effect, when the operation button 410 is operated, it is notified that the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed. When the operation button 410 is not operated, the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed. Do not report that In addition, the button effect may be executed even when the occurrence of the second hold memory is not concealed. In such a case, when the operation button 410 is operated in the button effect, the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed. Notify that it has not been done. As the predetermined timing, after the end of the chance mode, an ending effect indicating the end of the chance mode is being executed, and the ending effect is being executed.

  As described above, during execution of the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time, it may be notified that the second hold memory has occurred, but during the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol may be notified. Is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol, the small hit gaming state is executed, but the small hit gaming state cannot be entered into the second big winning opening 2005b, and the big hit gaming state occurs. May not. In such a case, after the end of the small hitting game state, an ending period (for example, "sorry" is displayed on the effect display device 1600) indicating the end of the small hitting gaming state (the present embodiment). In the ending period, not the ending effect indicating the end of the small hitting game state, but the effect of notifying that the second hold memory has already occurred (continuous effect) is executed. do it.

  Further, when the above-described concealment condition is satisfied a plurality of times and the occurrence of the plurality of second hold storages is concealed, it may be notified that the plurality of second hold storages have occurred at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, it may be notified that only one second hold storage has occurred.

  By the way, when the fact is notified at the time of occurrence of the second reserved storage, the content of the report depends on whether or not the number of the second reserved storage reaches the limit number (four in this example). Is changing. Specifically, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, when the number of second pending storages has not reached the limit number, an effect of notifying that one second pending storage has occurred is executed, When the second reserved storage number reaches the limit number, as a subsequent effect, a special effect (such as playing a special movie) that is not normally executed is executed. Thereby, when the special effect is executed, it is possible to recognize that the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number. In addition, when the above-described confidentiality condition is satisfied, regardless of whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number, it is not notified when the second reserved storage is generated, When the number of two reserved memories reaches the limit number, the special effect described above is executed. Thereby, even if the above-mentioned confidential condition is satisfied, it is possible to recognize that the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number by executing at least the special effect, and the second starting port 2004 during the chance mode Unnecessary driving is avoided. In addition, when the above-described confidential condition is satisfied, after the second hold storage is generated, at a predetermined timing, an effect of notifying that the second hold storage has already been performed is executed. When a special effect is executed, such an effect is not executed.

  Next, a specific example in which the fact that the second hold storage has occurred will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, a first specific example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 shows a case where one second hold storage, which is the number of hit determination storages on the second special symbol side, occurs during the chance mode. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect for notifying the effect when one second hold storage is generated is executed. Then, after the end of the chance mode, the process shifts to the winning right exercising time based on the occurrence of one second holding memory. During the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol stops at a small hit symbol. The small hitting game state is executed based on the display, and the large hitting game state is executed on condition that the game ball which has won the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting gaming state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. are doing. In such a jackpot game state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and a second hold memory occurs, the player concentrates on entering the second big winning port 2005b in the jackpot game state. Therefore, when the second hold storage occurs, the fact is not notified.

  Then, after that, when the big hit game state being executed ends, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, an ending period (5 seconds in this embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game state can be executed. In the ending period, not the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit gaming state, but the display of "still more!" On the effect display device 1600 notifies that the second hold storage has occurred. To ensure that the winning exercise time continues. In the ending period, after the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game state is executed, the ending effect may be switched to the continuous effect, for example, when three seconds have elapsed. In this way, the notification of the fact that the second reserved memory has occurred and notifying the fact that the second pending memory is occurring during the ending effect after the occurrence of the second reserved memory ends the winning right exercising time. Then, the recognition is changed, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

  Next, a second specific example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 shows that the normal symbol change display is started immediately before the end of the big hit game state before the start of the chance mode, and after the start of the chance mode, the stop mode of the normal symbol becomes a symbol per ordinary symbol, and the second symbol in the time saving state is displayed. The case where the protruding state is controlled for 6 seconds as the opening time of the start port door 2022 and the game ball can enter the second start port 2004 is shown. Since the effect using the effect display device 1600 has not been performed for the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol straddling before and after the start of the chance mode, the game ball is transferred to the second starting port 2004 after the start of the chance mode. Even if the player enters the ball and the second pending storage occurs, the fact is not notified when the second pending storage occurs.

  If the notification is not given when the second hold storage is generated, the last battle effect (FIG. 166) is performed in the remaining 10 seconds before the end of the chance mode (before the elapse of the long fluctuation time). See). In such a last battle effect, at the end of the chance mode (when the long fluctuation time elapses), the battle is lost, but after the end of the chance mode (after the long fluctuation time elapses), the battle is reversed from the defeat. To perform a resurrection effect to win the battle, and recognize that the winning right exercising time will be started after the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. As described above, when the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol straddles before and after the start of the chance mode, the fact that the second hold storage occurs immediately after the start of the chance mode is not notified, and the occurrence of the second hold storage is not performed. By notifying that fact later, it is possible to give a surprise to the player, reversing from recognition that the winning right exercising time has not started.

  Note that, in the second specific example, the case where the second hold storage is generated only immediately after the start of the chance mode is shown. However, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second start port 2004 during the chance mode. When the second second hold memory is generated, and when the second second hold memory is generated, this is notified, and the transition to the jackpot gaming state at the winning right exercising time is confirmed. There is. In such a case, the process shifts to the winning right exercising time based on the occurrence of two second pending memories. During the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol. The small hitting game state is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball which has won the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting gaming state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 and the big hit gaming state is executed. I have. During the execution of such a jackpot game state, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600. However, in a predetermined round, the second hold memory is generated immediately after the start of the chance mode. An additional effect that informs the player that the game has been played is executed, and the player is made aware that the winning right exercising time will continue after the jackpot game state ends. As described above, when the second hold memory is generated immediately after the start of the chance mode, the fact is not notified, and the fact is notified during the execution of the jackpot game state during the winning right exercising time, thereby exercising the winning right. Reversing from recognition that the time is over, it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness.

  Next, a third specific example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 shows that, in the chance mode, when the stop state of the ordinary symbol is the symbol per ordinary symbol, the opening state of the second starting door 2022 in the time saving state is controlled to be in the protruding state for 6 seconds. The game balls can enter the second starting port 2004, but two game balls enter the protruding second starting port 2004, and the number of hit determinations on the second special symbol side is stored. In this case, two second pending storages are generated consecutively. As a general rule, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state, but before the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. In some cases, a second game ball may enter the second starting port 2004. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect for notifying the effect when one second hold storage is generated is executed. However, at the time when the second second holding memory is generated, the player is conscious of the fact that one game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. , Did not announce that.

  Then, after the end of the chance mode, the process shifts to the winning right exercising time based on the occurrence of two second holding memories. During the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol stops at the small hit symbol. The small hitting game state is executed based on the display, and the large hitting game state is executed on condition that the game ball which has won the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting gaming state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. are doing. During the execution of such a jackpot gaming state, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600. However, in a predetermined round, the second second hold memory is stored during the chance mode. An additional effect for notifying that the event has occurred is executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time will continue after the jackpot game state ends. In this way, when the second second hold storage occurs during the chance mode, the fact is not notified, and during the execution of the jackpot game state based on the occurrence of the first second hold storage, By notifying that fact, the recognition that the winning right exercising time is over can be reversed, and the player can be given unexpectedness.

Next, a fourth specific example will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the fourth specific example shows a case where the last battle effect shown in FIG. 166 is not executed.
FIG. 170 shows a case where one second hold storage, which is the number of hit determination storages on the second special symbol side, occurs during the chance mode. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect for notifying the effect when one second hold storage is generated is executed. Then, just before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started, and before and after the end of the opportunity mode, the stop state of the ordinary symbol becomes a symbol per ordinary symbol. During the opening time of 2022, the protruding state may be controlled for 6 seconds to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004 in some cases. If a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 before and after the end of such a chance mode and a second hold memory is generated, it is not possible to notify the fact during the chance mode, and the second hold At the time when the memory occurs, it is not notified.

  Then, after the end of the chance mode, the process shifts to the winning right exercising time based on the occurrence of the second hold memory. During the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol. The small hitting game state is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball which has won the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting gaming state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 and the big hit gaming state is executed. I have. During the execution of such a big hitting game state, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600. However, in a predetermined round, a second hold storage occurs before and after the end of the chance mode. An additional effect that informs the player that the game has been played is executed, and the player is made aware that the winning right exercising time will continue after the jackpot game state ends. In this manner, when the second hold storage occurs before and after the end of the chance mode, the fact is not notified, and during the execution of the jackpot game state based on the occurrence of the first second hold storage, the fact is not notified. , The recognition that the winning right exercising time is over is reversed, and the player can be given an unexpectedness.

  In the fourth specific example, before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, and the first second holding memory is generated. In this case, there is shown a case in which the game mode has shifted to the jackpot game state at the time of winning right exercising, but at that time no game ball has entered the second starting port 2004 and the jackpot game at the time of exercising the winning right The transition to the state may not be finalized. In such a case, for example, just before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), the second holding memory is generated based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, and the second holding memory is generated. If this is not notified at that point, in the ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) during which the ending effect indicating the end of the chance mode can be executed after the end of the chance mode, the end of the chance mode (3 seconds remaining) ), An additional effect notifying that the second hold storage has occurred may be executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time starts after the chance mode ends. Also, for example, when a second hold memory is generated based on a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 after the end of the chance mode, and the second hold memory is not notified when the second hold memory occurs, During the variation display of the first special symbol (loss variation) performed after the end of the chance mode (after the ending effect of the chance mode), it is notified that the second hold storage has occurred after the end of the chance mode. May be executed, and it may be recognized that the winning right exercising time is started after the first special symbol is changed and displayed. Even in these cases, when the second hold memory is generated before and after the end of the chance mode, the fact is not notified when the second hold memory is generated, but by notifying the fact after the second hold memory is generated, the winning right exercise time is not started. It is possible to give a surprise to the player by changing from recognition.

[15. Production example]
Next, an example of an effect display performed by the effect display device 1600 will be described. FIG. 171 shows an example of an effect display which is executed when the transition from the normal mode to the chance mode is controlled and a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 during the chance mode, and FIG. 172 shows the second display during the chance mode. FIG. 173 is an example of an effect display that is executed when the chance mode is ended without accepting the game ball in the starting port 2004. FIG. 173 shows that when the remaining time of the chance mode reaches 10 seconds, the second hold storage number is increased. Otherwise, it is an example of an effect display during the last battle effect to be executed, and when a loss occurs as a result of the fluctuation display in the long fluctuation time of the first special symbol, a game ball is accepted in the second start port 2004. FIG. 174 is an example of the effect display sometimes performed, and FIG. 174 shows the last battle in the case where a large hit results as a result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the long fluctuation time. It is an example of the effect display to be executed by the out.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (A), when the hit determination on the first special symbol side results in a big hit (10R big hit A) for controlling to the time-saving state after the big hit game state, it is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Then, the first special figure corresponding decorative design area is displayed in a variable manner in the first special figure corresponding decorative display area 1606, and the left / middle / right decorative pattern 1605 is variably displayed in the first special figure corresponding decorative display area. When the big hit symbol of the first special figure corresponding decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at 1606 and the big hit symbol of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 1605 is stopped and displayed, after the big hit is notified, the big hit game state is controlled. It starts (FIG. 171 (B)). As shown in FIG. 171 (A), during the normal mode, the effect display device 1600 displays the first special figure corresponding decorative display area 1606, the second special figure corresponding decorative display area 1607, and the general figure corresponding decorative display area 1608. In addition, in the lower part, there are provided first special figure reserved display areas 1613a to 1613d for displaying the first reserved stored number corresponding to the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area.

  Then, after the big hitting game state, it is notified that the game mode is to be controlled to the chance mode (time saving state), and the mode information display area 1612 is displayed to indicate that the right-hand operation is performed (FIG. 171 (C)). When it disappears, the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed in the long fluctuating time, and the first special figure corresponding decorative display area 1606 is fluctuated and displayed in the first special figure corresponding decorative display area 1606 in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. (FIG. 171 (D)). As described above, during the chance mode, the timer display area 1610 indicating the remaining time in the chance mode is displayed, and is displayed in the timer display area 1610 according to the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. The remaining time to be updated is displayed.

  In addition, when the number of stored ordinary symbols is no longer 0, the decorative symbols corresponding to the ordinary symbols are displayed in the ordinary symbol corresponding display area 1608 in synchronization with the variable display of the ordinary symbols, and the left, middle, and right decorations are displayed. The symbol 1605 is displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time, the symbol corresponding to the general symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol-specific decorative display area 1608 at the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the ordinary symbol, and the left, center, and right decorations The symbol 1605 is stopped and displayed with a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the ordinary symbol (FIG. 171 (E)). At this time, if the result of the lottery process (normal judgment) for the ordinary symbol is a normal hit, the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative display area 1608, and the left, middle, and right decorations are displayed. The hit symbol of the symbol 1605 is stopped and displayed (FIG. 171 (F)).

  The main control board 1310 moves the second start port door 2022 of the second start port 2004 forward to a protruding state for a predetermined period when the hit symbol of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 1402, so that the second symbol is projected. The state of the starting port 2004 is controlled to an open state in which game balls can be received. Then, when a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 during the opening state of the second starting port 2004 and the holding of the second special symbol occurs, a “big hit get” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the second special symbol is displayed. The star mark in the area corresponding to the hold that has occurred (in the example of FIG. 171 (G), the second special figure hold display area 1610a) is displayed in a special mode (for example, red or the like) among the special figure hold display areas 1610a to 1610d. Thus, the fact that the right to win a jackpot (winning right) is obtained is notified (FIG. 171 (G)).

  After that, if there is the remaining time in the chance mode and the number of storages of the ordinary symbols, the ordinary symbols corresponding to the ordinary symbols are varied and displayed in the ordinary symbol corresponding display area 1608 in synchronization with the variation display of the ordinary symbols. -The right decorative pattern 1605 is variably displayed (FIG. 171 (H)).

  In addition, when the remaining time of the chance mode becomes 10 seconds without the game ball being accepted in the second starting port 2004 during the chance mode (FIGS. 172 (A) to 172 (C)), in this example, the last battle effect is produced. When executed, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is indicated. That is, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), the character A and the enemy character B on the player side are displayed instead of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and a duel scene of the character A and the enemy character B is displayed. (FIG. 172 (D)).

  Then, if the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a loss, after displaying a mode in which the character A is defeated by the enemy character (FIG. 172 (E)), if the second reserved storage number is 0, there is a chance. After notifying the player of ending the mode and ending the chance mode (FIG. 172 (F)), control of the normal mode is started (FIG. 172 (G)).

  In this way, when the remaining time in the chance mode is running short, a staging display different from the normal display in the chance mode is executed to not only incite the player's impatience and anxiety but also to expect the big hit. Embrace the game to improve the entertainment.

  Even if the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is lost, if a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the last battle effect and the second special symbol is held ( 173 (C) to 173 (D)), after displaying the mode in which the character A is defeated by the enemy character (FIG. 173 (D)), displaying the mode in which the character A is restored (FIG. 173 (D)). 173 (E)).

  Then, the chance mode is ended and the transition to the winning right exercise time is controlled, and the second special figure corresponding decorative symbol is variably displayed in the second special figure corresponding decorative display area 1607 in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, the left, middle and right decorative symbols 1605 are variably displayed, and if the result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side is a small hit, the second special figure corresponding decorative display area 1607 is displayed in the second special figure corresponding decorative display area 1607 after a predetermined period has elapsed. The small hit symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small hit symbol of the left / middle / right decorative symbol 1605 is stopped and displayed (FIG. 173 (F)).

  When the small winning symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display at 1405 on the second special symbol display, the main control board 1310 sets the second large winning opening 2005b to a state in which the game ball can accept for a predetermined period, The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays "Aim for V!" On the effect display device 1600 to notify the player to continue right-handing to aim for the V winning opening 2411 (FIG. 173 (G)). Then, a game ball is received in the second big winning opening 2005b, and one of the gaming balls is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 to notify that the big hit has been achieved, and the big hit gaming state (FIG. 173 (H)).

  In this way, it is possible to strongly expect the occurrence of a big hit by changing the result of the last battle effect according to not only the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side but also the occurrence of the reserved memory number on the second special symbol side. Because of this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in entertainment interest.

  If the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a big hit, after displaying a mode in which the character A defeats the enemy character as a result of the last battle effect (FIG. 174 (E)), the big hit game state (FIG. 174 (F)).

  After the end of the jackpot gaming state, if there is no second reserved storage number, the transition to the chance mode is controlled again (FIG. 174 (C)), and if there is the second reserved storage number, the transition to the winning right exercise time is controlled. Become.

  If the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a big hit, when the chance mode ends, the big hit based on the fact that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol regardless of the presence / absence of the second reserved memory number. The control of the game state is executed. Then, if there is the second reserved memory number after the end of the big hit gaming state, the process moves to the winning right exercising time and the variable display of the second special symbol is started. That is, prior to the exercise of the jackpot right accumulated during the chance mode, the advantage of the jackpot gaming state on the first special symbol side is provided.

  In addition, the last battle effect basically changes the result according to the result of the winning lottery on the first special symbol side, but at least the chance mode ends without notifying the player to that effect. Until the first special symbol jackpot is concealed from the player. As a result, an unexpected benefit of the first special symbol jackpot can be given to a player who recognizes that he or she will exercise the right to win the jackpot accumulated during the chance mode, and the game is played by adding the profit. Interest can be improved. Also, as described above, if the second reserved storage number is not 0, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner with priority over the first special symbol. Therefore, after the big hit game state based on the stop display of the first special symbol with the big hit symbol ends, the game shifts to the winning right exercising time, and the right to become the big hit accumulated during the chance mode is exercised. This avoids a situation in which the interest in playing games is reduced due to the lack of a chance to exercise the jackpot right accumulated during the chance mode.

  In addition, as described above, by right-handing in the winning right exercising time, a game ball can be made to win in the second big winning opening 2005b, and a game ball which has won in the second big winning opening 2005b becomes in the V winning opening 2411. Even if the game is distributed and the big hit game state occurs, by continuing right-handing, it is possible to make the first big winning opening 2005 win the game ball. That is, after the shift control to the chance mode is performed, the right-hand driving is continuously performed until the shift control to the normal mode is performed again.

  Further, in this example, even when the game ball is hit right, the game ball can be accepted into the first right starting port 2002b. Therefore, normally, the game mode is controlled from shifting to the chance mode until the chance mode ends, or the right to win. The game ball is to be accepted to the first right starting opening 2002b within a period until the exercising time is finished, and the first reserved memory number is set at the end of the chance mode or the end of the winning right exercising time. Has become. In other words, the game mode shifts to the chance mode to enter the second starting port 2004, or shifts to the winning right exercising time. During the period, a condition relating to the next game (accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2002) can be generated.

  If a game ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002 (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) during the chance mode or the winning right exercising time, the fact is notified. (Not only a display for notifying that a game ball has been accepted to the first starting port 2002 (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b), but also a sound or a lamp for notifying In addition, an area for displaying the first pending storage number is provided in the effect display device 1600 even during the chance mode or the winning right exercising time, and the first starting port 2002 (the first left starting port 2002a, the first right starting port) is provided. The display of the number of retained storages may be updated when a game ball is received in the mouth 2002b).) As a result, particularly during the right exercising time, the game ball is accepted to the first starting port 2002 (the first left starting port 2002a, the first right starting port 2002b), so that the mode again shifts to the chance mode, and the first special symbol has a long fluctuation. It is possible to recognize that the time-varying display is started, and it is possible to enhance interest in acquiring a right to win a bigger hit (winning right).

  Also, as described above, during the chance mode, a game in which the second special symbol is reserved (second special random number) is stored. Since the upper limit of the number of second reserved storages is four, up to four reserved special second symbols (second special random numbers) can be stored during the chance mode. In this example, when the number of second reserved storages reaches the upper limit of four during the chance mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a replaces the display of the decorative symbol and the timer display area 1611 on the effect display device 1600 with a special effect (special movie). May be executed. In other words, when the number of second reserved memories reaches the upper limit of four, the player stops driving the game balls until the winning right exercising time is reached, so that a special effect (such as playing a special movie) must be performed. Can solve the problem.

  In addition, since the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is increased based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 provided on the right side of the center role 2500, a right-handed shot is usually made during the chance mode. A prompt (mode information display area 1612) is displayed. On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a special effect (such as playing a special movie) on the effect display device 1600 based on the fact that the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit of four during the chance mode, the right is performed. The display (mode information display area 1612) that prompts the user to strike is erased. Thus, unnecessary driving can be avoided so as not to be disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the urging of the unnecessary driving. In this case, the display that prompts right-handing (mode information display area 1612) is not limited to one that disappears, but may be any display that suppresses (conservative display) more than the normal display state in the chance mode. For example, one or two or more of the following may be executed in combination: reducing the display for prompting right-handing (mode information display area 1612), thinning (semi-transparent) characters, changing the display position to a less visible position, and the like. It may be.

  In the above example, the long change time of the first special symbol is set to 120 seconds, and the chance mode is controlled only during this period. Control may be performed for a plurality of types of chance modes having different degrees of advantage due to different periods. For example, two types of the first special symbol long variation time of 68 seconds and 128 seconds are provided, and when starting the variation display of the first special symbol in the time saving state, one of them is determined based on the variation random number. Is also good.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a big hit (10R big hit A in this example) for controlling to the time saving state after the big hit game state, the hit after the big hit game state is performed. In the time saving state, the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed with the long fluctuation time, and the reserve of the second special symbol (second special random number) is accumulated during the long fluctuation time, and the number of big hits corresponding to the number of second reserved memories is stored. Are sequentially generated after the elapse of the long fluctuating time, and thereafter, a game in which the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed again with the long fluctuating time can be repeatedly executed. Note that, as described above, the state in which the second special symbol is held (the state in which the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004) is a state in which the right to win a big hit (winning right) is acquired. In other words, it can be rephrased as "special information linked to a hit (big hit)".

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can realize a novel gameplay having a cycle in which a state in which special information leading to a hit is stored and a state in which hits corresponding to the number of the stored special information are sequentially released are repeated. As a result, a game that simply waits for a new hit after the end of the big hit gaming state is executed, and “how much special information that leads to the hit within the time limit (within the long fluctuation time) is stored (storage). Can you do it?) And give them both a sense of tension to accumulate special information within the time limit and a satisfaction to collectively gain profit (big hit game state) after the time limit. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest after the jackpot gaming state.

Further, the configuration of storing the second special symbol (second special random number) during the variable display of the first special symbol requires at least the following conditions.
"The fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time-saving state> (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the time-saving state + the maximum time in which the second start-up door 2022 is in the protruding state at the time of the normal drawing in the time-saving state) .times.N ( N ≧ 2) ”, that is, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed a plurality of times within the variable period of the first special symbol, and the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 when the normal symbol is reached. It is necessary that the state can be controlled multiple times.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined. In this case, the same operation and effect can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 6 CR unit 10 Upper frame member 11 Engagement notch 12 Mounting step 20 Lower frame member 21 Engagement notch 22 Front end notch 30 Left frame Member 31 Depression 32 Projection 40 Right frame member 41 Depression 42 Projection 50 Curtain plate member 51 Rear extension 52 Left discharge hole 53 Right discharge hole 54 Standing wall 55 Returning portion 56 Left mounting portion 57 Right mounting portion 60 Outer frame side Upper hinge member 61 Upper fixing part 62 Front extension part 63 Bearing groove 64 Horizontal fixing part 65 Hanging part 66 Lock member 66a Lock body 66b Operation part 66c Elastic part 66d Mounting hole 67 Mounting screw 70 Outer frame side lower hinge member 71 Horizontal part 72 Rising part 73 Hinge pin under outer frame 74 Discharge hole
80 curtain plate reinforcing member 81 left sliding member 82 right sliding member 85 connecting member 85A upper left connecting member 85B upper right connecting member 85C lower left connecting member 85D lower right connecting member 86 horizontal fixed portion 87 upper horizontal fixed portion 88 lower horizontal fixed portion 89 bent portion 90 Upper hook member 91 Lower hook member 95 Guide blade 96 Guide blade 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame base 111 Through hole 112 Handle mounting seat surface 113 Cylinder mounting portion 114 Cylinder insertion hole 115 Ball feed opening 116 Lower plate passage port 117 Passage opening for upper plate 118 Glass unit mounting portion 119 Speaker insertion hole 130 Reinforcement unit 131 Upper reinforcement sheet metal 132 Medium reinforcement sheet metal 132a Notch 133 Left reinforcement sheet metal 134 Right reinforcement sheet metal 135 Locking / locking section 140 Door frame side upper hinge member 141 Hinge shaft bracket on door frame 141a Projecting piece 142 Hinge pin on door frame 143 Flange member 144 Lock spring 150 Lower hinge member on door frame side 151 Hinge shaft bracket on lower door frame 151a Extension piece 152 Door frame lower hinge pin 160 Door frame left side decorative board 161 Door frame left side decorative board 161a LED
162 Door frame left side lower decorative board 162a LED
170 Glass unit mounting member 171 Base 172 Projecting portion 180 Handle mounting member 181 Cylindrical portion 182 Flange portion 183 Ridge 184 Reinforcing rib 190 Glass unit 191 Glass frame 191a Mounting piece 191b Locking piece 192 Glass plate 194 Frame decoration drive amplifier board 194a + 9V Creation circuit 200 Security cover 201 Main body 202 Back projection 203 Locking piece 210 Opening / closing cylinder unit 211 Cylinder lock 211a Keyhole 212 Rotation transmission member 212a Notch 213 Cylinder mounting plate 213a Front plate 213b Side plate 213c Mounting plate 250 Ball feed Unit 251 Front cover 251a Entrance 251b Ball outlet 251c Slit 252 Rear cover 252a Ball supply port 252b Mounting recess 253 Ball release member 253a Partition 253b Rotating rod part 253c Working rod 253d Weight part 254 Ball feed member 254a Blocking part 254b Ball holding part 254c Rod part 255 Ball feed solenoid 256 Ball feed operation rod 257 Ball feed crank 257a Engagement part 257b Shaft part 257c Transmission part 260 Member 261 Upper piece part 262 Lower piece part 263 Inclined part 270 Fall cover unit 271 Unit main body 272 Cover member 273 Through ball passage 274 Full ball receiving port 275 Foul ball receiving port 276 Ball discharge port 277 Storage path 278 Movable piece 279 Full tank Detection sensor 280 Spring 281 Door opening / closing contact part 300 Handle unit 301 Handle base 301a Base 301b Front end 301c Groove 302 Handle 302a First projection 302b Second projection 302c Third projection 302d Fourth projection 302es Lit 302f Locking projection 303 Handle cover 303a Mounting boss 304 Inner base 305 Shaft member 305a Drive gear 306 Transmission gear 307 Handle rotation detection sensor 307a Detection shaft 308 Handle return spring 309 Auxiliary spring 310 Handle touch sensor 311 Single button 312 Single button Operation sensor 315 Handle relay terminal plate 320 Plate unit 321 Upper plate 321a Induction passage 321b Grounding bracket 322 Lower plate 322a Lower plate ball hole (lower plate discharge port)
322b relief part 322c ball guiding part (guiding means)
322d buffer part (guidance means)
322e return part (guidance means)
323 Plate unit base 323a Upper plate ball supply port 323b Speaker slit 323c Lower plate ball supply port (lower plate supply port)
323d Upper plate ball feed port 323e Ball feed guide path 323f Ball release guide path 323g Opening 323h Handle insertion port 323i Cylinder insertion port 324 Upper plate body 325 Lower plate body 325A Main body section 325B First extension section 325C Second extension section 325a Bottom Wall part 325b Main body standing wall part 326 Dish unit cover (covering part)
326a Direction operation unit attachment part (covering part)
326b Dish front upper decorative part 326c Dish lower front decorative part 326d Lower plate opening 326e Lower speaker opening 326f Handle insertion opening 326g Cylinder insertion opening 326h Top plate part 326i Bottom plate part 326j Mounting space 327 Upper tray ball release button (discharge operation part)
327a Actuator 327b Ball removal slider 327c Upper ball removal spring 328 Ball lending button 329 Return button 330 Ball lending display section 331 Production selection left button 332 Production selection right button 333 Lower ball release button 334 Lid member 335 Lower ball Drilling base 335a Discharge port 340 Lower plate cover 340a Cover upright wall portion 340b Ceiling portion 365 Degree display plate 365a Ball lending switch 365b Return switch 365d CR unit lamp A1 Lower plate first region A2 Lower plate second region PL Division line 400 Production operation unit (Coating part)
400A Second production operation unit (covering part)
410 Operation buttons (operation receiving section)
411 button lens 411a first button decoration part 411b second button decoration part 412 button frame 412a frame opening 413 button base 413a body part 413b flange part 413c guide boss part 413d detecting piece 413e base opening part 415 frame unit 416 frame body 416a center Opening 416b Outer peripheral opening 416c Notch 416d Inner tube 416e Attachment 417 Frame side lens 418 Frame top lens 420 Substrate unit 421 Substrate base 422 Operation button left outer decorative substrate 422a First LED
422b Second LED
423 Operation Button Right Outside Decoration Board 423a First LED
423b Second LED
424 Vibration motor 424a Weight 425 Motor cover 430 Base unit 431 Unit base 431a Through hole 431b Holding hole 431c Light shielding wall portion 432 Decorative member inside operation button 432a Peripheral wall portion 432b Front plate portion 432c Opening portion 432d Flange portion 432e First mounting boss 432e Inner decoration part 423g Second button inner decoration part 433 Operation button left inner decoration substrate 434 Operation button right inner decoration substrate 435 Operation button upper inner decoration substrate 436 Operation button lower inner decoration substrate 437 Frame top lens decoration substrate 438 Operation button spring 439 Sensor holder 440 Press detection sensor 441 Production operation unit relay board 442 Relay board cover 442a Leg 450 Second base unit 451 Unit base 451a Main body 451b Cover 4 1c through hole 451d holding hole 451e upper bearing portion 451f lower bearing portion 451g rotation restricting portion 452 button shaft 454 press detection sensor 460 door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
460A Door frame side second effect display device 461 Liquid crystal display device 462 Mounting bracket 470 Screen unit 471 Main screen 472 Sub screen 472a Peripheral decoration portion 472b Screen portion 473 Upper shaft member 474 Lower shaft member 475 Operating gear member 475a Gear teeth 475b Stopper 475c Detecting piece 476 Sub-screen decorative member 477 Sub-screen decorative substrate 477a LED
478 Peripheral decoration member 480 Upper bearing member 481 Bearing member 481a Depression 482 Frame top lens decoration board 485 Lower bearing member 490 Rotation drive unit 491 Unit case 492 Switching drive motor 495 Second transmission gear 500 Projector 501 Projector body 502 Lens unit 505 Projector Attachment member 505a Slit 506 Upper cover 507 Rotation detection sensor 510 Buffer unit 511 Buffer member 512 Buffer base 512a Main body 512b Leg piece 515 Second effect operation unit relay board 516 Relay board cover 530 Door frame left side unit 531 Left unit base 531a Opening 532 Left unit diffusion lens member 532A Upper diffusion lens member 532B Lower diffusion lens member 532a Circular lens portion 532b Shaped lens part 532c Central diffuse reflection part 532d Front diffusion lens part 532e Input lens part 532f Front reflection part 534 Left unit upper decoration base 535 Left unit lower decoration base 536 Left unit decoration cover 537 Decoration member 550 Door frame right side unit 551 Right unit Base 552 Door frame right side decorative board 552A Door frame right side upper decorative board 552B Door frame right side lower decorative board 552a Left LED
552b Right LED
552c Medium LED
553 right unit left diffusion lens member 553a body portion 553b rear wall portion 553c cutout portion 553d housing recess 553e input lens portion 553f side reflection portion 554 right unit left decorative member 555 right unit left cover 556 right unit right diffusion lens member 556a body portion 556b Rear wall part 556c Notch part 556d Housing concave part 556e Input lens part 556f Side reflection part 557 Right unit right decoration member 558 Right unit right cover 559 Right unit left light shielding member 559a Body part 559b Rear wall part 559c Notch part 559d Reinforcement part 560 Right unit Right light shielding member 561 Right unit decorative lens member 561a Circular decorative portion 561b Multi-face decorative portion 562 Right unit decorative base 563 Right unit cover 564 Decoration member 570 Door frame top unit 571 Medium Base 572 Side base 573 Upper speaker 574 Unit body 574a Opening 574b Slit 574c Upper opening 574d Lower opening 574e Top left decorative part 574f Top right decorative part 575 Speaker cover 576 Top middle decorative member 577 Door frame top middle decorative board 578 Conductor Light member 578a Direct portion 578b Arc portion 578c Diffuse reflection portion 578d Diffusion input portion 579 Top left decorative lens member 579a Decorative lens portion 580 Top right decorative lens member 580a Decorative lens portion 581 Top middle left decorative member 582 Top middle right decorative member 583 Door Frame top left decorative board 583a LED
584 Door frame top right decorative board 584a LED
585 Board base 586 Door frame top middle left decorative board 586a LED
587 Door frame top middle right decorative board 587a LED
588 Light shielding member 589 Door frame top unit relay board 590 Relay board cover 591 Upper cover 592 Lower cover CL Center axis (of operation button 410)
600 Body frame base 601 Game board insertion slot 602 Game board placement section 603 Game board regulation section 604 Launcher mounting section 605 Cylinder insertion port 606 Connection opening 607 Speaker opening 608 Rear extension 609 Upper hinge mounting section 610 Lower hinge attachment part 615 Opening cover 616 Game board lock member 618 Door frame release switch 619 Body frame release switch 620 Body frame side upper hinge member 621 Upper hinge body 622 Body frame upper hinge pin 623 Door frame upper hinge hole 640 Body frame side lower Hinge member 641 Lower hinge first main body 643 Lower hinge second main body 644 Door frame hinge hole 645 Restriction piece 660 Reinforcement frame 661 Left positioning member 680 Ball launching device 681 Launching base 682 Launching solenoid 683 Ball hammer 684 Launching rail 700 Locking unit 70 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Unit base 702 Door frame hook 703 Outer frame hook 710 Key cylinder 784 External terminal board 800 Dispensing unit 801 Dispensing unit base 802 Ball tank 803 Tank rail 804 Ball leveling member 820 Ball guiding unit 821 Front case 821a Ball guiding entrance 821b Ball guide outlet 821c Guide path 821d Introducing section 821e Detecting section 821f Meandering section 821g Notch section 822 Rear case 822a Ball guiding inlet 822b Ball guiding outlet 822c Guide path 822d Introducing section 822e Detecting section 822f Serpentine section 822g Cutting section 822g Cutting section 822g 825 Movable piece front 825a Movable piece 825b Shaft hole 825c Extension 825d Connecting part 825e Weight attachment 825f Detecting piece 825g Stopper piece 826 Movable piece after 826a Movable piece 826b Shaft hole 826c Extension part 826d Connection part 826e Weight attachment part 826f Detecting piece 826g Stopper piece 827 Ball out detection sensor 830 Dispensing device 831 Front box 831a Dispensing inlet 831b Discharging outlet 831c Ball removing outlet 831d Discharging path Guide 831e 831g Lever mounting portion 832 Rear box 832a Dispensing inlet 832b Discharging outlet 832c Ball emptying outlet 832d Discharge passage 832e Ball emptying passage 832f Induction shelf 832g Lever attaching portion 833 Front cover 834 Dispensing motor 835 Drive gear 837 a Gear 837 a Gear 837 a Detecting piece 837c Connecting part 838 Shaft member 839 Dispensing blade 839a Base cylinder part 839b Front blade 839c Rear blade 839d Connected part 839e Ball storage part 840 Blade rotation detection sensor 841 Partition plate 842 Discharge detection sensor 843 Ball removal movable piece 843a Body 843b Shaft tube 843c Projection 843d Weight attachment 844 Ball release lever 850 Upper tank filled path unit 850a Upper discharge ball receiving port 850b Upper ball discharge inlet 850c Upper Ball storage passage 850d Normal discharge port 850e Full tank discharge port 850f Partition piece 850g Upper ball discharge path 850h Upper ball discharge outlet 851 Upper full tank base 852 Upper full tank cover 853 Dispensing device pressing member 854 Back cover mounting section 860 Lower full tank path Unit 860b Error LED display 869 Game ball rental device connection terminal board 861 Normal taxiway 862 Full tank taxiway 863 Taxiway opening / closing door 863a Base 863b First door plate 863c Second door plate 863d Extension 863e Working protrusion Part 8 64 Closing spring 865 Lower ball empty guideway 866 Upper case 867 Lower case 867a Boss 868 Frame peripheral relay terminal plate 869 Game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 870 Guideway opening / closing door 870a Base 870b First door plate 870c Second Door plate portion 870d Concave portion 870e Working protrusion 880 Main door relay terminal plate 882 Peripheral door relay terminal plate 900 Board unit 910 Board unit base 911 Door frame relay board 920 Speaker unit 921 Speaker 930 Power supply board box 934 Power switch 931 Power supply board 935 Power supply control unit 935a Synchronous rectification circuit 935b Power factor improvement circuit 935c Smoothing circuit 935d Power generation circuit 940 Interface control board box 950 Dispense control board box 951 Dispense control board 951a Dispense control filter circuit 952 payout control unit 952a payout control MPU
952b Dispensing control input circuit 952c Dispensing control output circuit 952d Dispensing motor drive circuit 952da Voltage switching circuit 952e CR unit input / output circuit 953 Firing control unit 953a Firing control circuit 954 Operation switch 980 Back cover 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1001 Inner rail 1003 Out guide part 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stopper part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Security concave part 1009 Positioning protrusion 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notch part 1100 Gaming panel 1110 Panel plate 1111 Out concave part 1112 Opening 1113 Fitting hole 1114 Long hole 1115 Engagement step 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding step 1122 Through hole 1123 Projection pin 1124 Engagement claw 1125 Engage 1126 Out port 1127 notch 1128 mounting hole 1129 through opening 1150 gaming panel (Second Embodiment)
1151 Out port 1152 Notch 1153 Insertion hole 1154 Inner rail fixing hole 1155 Mounting hole 1200 Board holder 1201 Discharge unit 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1310a Main control MPU
1310aa Main control CPU core 1310ae Main circumference serial transmission port 1310aea Transmission shift register 1310aeb Transmission buffer register 1310aec Serial management unit 1310af WDT
1310an Hard random number circuit 1310b Main control input circuit 1310c Main control output circuit 1310ca Main control output circuit with reset function 1310cb Main control output circuit without reset function 1310d Main control solenoid drive circuit 1310e Power failure monitoring circuit 1300g + 5V creation circuit 1300h Main control filter circuit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status display 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1510b + 3.3V generation circuit 1511 Peripheral control unit 1511a Peripheral control MPU
1511aa Peripheral control CPU core 1511ab Peripheral control built-in RAM
1511ac Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ad Peripheral control bus controller 1511ae Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511af Peripheral control built-in WDT
1511ag Peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ak Peripheral control A / D converter 1511ai Peripheral bus 1511ah Internal bus 1511b Peripheral control ROM
1511c Peripheral control RAM
1511d Peripheral control SRAM
1511e Peripheral control external WDT
1511h External bus 1512 Liquid crystal display controller 1512a VDP with built-in sound source
1512b Liquid crystal and sound control ROM
1512c Audio data transmission IC
1512d Transmitter IC for directing door frame side
1512e Differentiating circuit 1512f Forced switching circuit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1600 Gaming board side display unit 1600a Liquid crystal module 1600b Back light power supply 1601 Left fixed piece 1602 Right fixed piece 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning opening 2002a First left starting port 2002b First right starting port 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting port 2005 First big winning opening 2005b Second big winning opening 2011 Distributing member 2012 First passage 2013 Second passage entrance 2014 Second passage 2015 Second passage exit 2016 Reception entrance 2017 CLUNE 2021 Constantly driven door 2022 Second starting port door 2107 Constantly driven solenoid 2108 Second starting port solenoid 2109 First attacker solenoid 2110 Second attacker solenoid 2200 Side unit Lower 2300 Side unit Upper 2400 V prize device 2410 Rotating body 2411 V prize port 2412 Discharge port 2500 Center role item 2520 Warp inlet 2522 Warp outlet 2530 Stage 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3010b Liquid crystal mounting part 3010c Fixed groove 3010d Cut off 3010e Fixed piece part 3042 Production drive board box 3050 Back left middle decoration unit 3100 Rear lower movable production unit 3200 Rear upper left movable production unit 3300 Rear left movable production unit 3400 Rear upper middle movable production unit 3500 Rear lower front movable production unit 4002a First left starting port sensor 4002b First right starting port sensor 4003 Gate sensor 4004 Second starting port sensor 4005a First count sensor 4005b Second counter Sensor 4007a First V winning opening sensor 4007b Second V winning opening sensor 4008 Outlet sensor 4020 General winning opening sensor 4024 Magnetic detection sensor 4161 Panel relay board 4162 Sensor signal input section 4163 Voltage output section 4164 Detection circuit section 4165 RTC control section 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 Voltage raising section 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board 4450 Effect display drive board 4450v Liquid crystal module circuit 4450x Door frame side effect module power supply circuit 4450y Door frame side effect module backlight power circuit MGS Magnetic sensor STR Transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 Connector RR Contact resistance CNO2 Connector

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area on the front,
A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area,
Distributing means for distributing a game ball passing through a specific area in the game area to one of a first passage and a second passage formed in the game area;
A first starting port into which a game ball flowing down the first passage can enter;
A second starting port in which a game ball flowing down the second passage is enterable, and has a different degree of advantage from the first starting port;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a ball entering the first starting port or the second starting port;
Profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit based on the result of the lottery,
The game ball is caused to flow alternately into the first passage and the second passage by using the distribution means, so that the ball can be sequentially entered into the first starting port and the second starting port. Gaming machine.